Communication system and communication method

ABSTRACT

A communication system includes one or more chargers and a server capable of communicating with the one or more chargers. The server obtains first information from a first vehicle via a first charger included in the one or more chargers, during charging of the first vehicle by the first charger, and supplies second information based on the first information to a second vehicle via a second charger included in the one or more chargers, during charging of the second vehicle by the second charger.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This application is a U.S. Continuation Application of PCT InternationalPatent Application Number PCT/JP2018/039417 filed on Oct. 24, 2018,claiming the benefit of priority of Japanese Patent Application Number2017-207345 filed on Oct. 26, 2017, the entire contents of which arehereby incorporated by reference.

BACKGROUND 1. Technical Field

The present disclosure relates to a communication system and acommunication method.

2. Description of the Related Art

A conventional example of a communication method performed using aplurality of antennas is a communication method called multiple-inputmultiple-output (MIMO). In multi-antenna communication typified by MIMO,data reception quality and/or a data communication rate (per unit time)can be enhanced by modulating transmission data of a plurality ofstreams and simultaneously transmitting modulated signals from differentantennas using the same frequency (common frequency).

Furthermore, in such multi-antenna communication, an antenna having aquasi-omni pattern which allows a transmitting device to have asubstantially constant antenna gain in various directions in a space maybe used when multicast/broadcast communication is performed. Forexample, WO2011/055536 discloses that a transmitting device transmits amodulated signal using an antenna having a quasi-omni pattern.

SUMMARY

There is a demand for further improvement in performance of the overallsystem and support for new forms of services, when a communicationmethod, exemplified by a communication method performed using aplurality of antennas, is used.

A communication system according to one aspect of the present disclosureincludes one or more chargers and a server capable of communicating withthe one or more chargers. The server obtains first information from afirst vehicle via a first charger included in the one or more chargers,during charging of the first vehicle by the first charger, and suppliessecond information based on the first information to a second vehiclevia a second charger included in the one or more chargers, duringcharging of the second vehicle by the second charger.

The present disclosure makes it possible to facilitate the improvementin performance of a communication system and support for new forms ofservices.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DRAWINGS

These and other objects, advantages and features of the disclosure willbecome apparent from the following description thereof taken inconjunction with the accompanying drawings that illustrate a specificembodiment of the present disclosure.

FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of a basestation;

FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of anantenna unit of the base station;

FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of thebase station;

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of aterminal;

FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of anantenna unit of a terminal;

FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a configuration of aterminal;

FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of communicationbetween the base station and terminals;

FIG. 8 is a diagram for describing a relation of a plurality of streams;

FIG. 9 is a diagram illustrating an example of a frame configuration;

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a frame configuration;

FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol configuration;

FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of communicationbetween the base station and terminals;

FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a relation of a plurality of modulatedsignals;

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating an example of a frame configuration;

FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an example of a frame configuration;

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating an example of a symbol configuration;

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of communicationbetween the base station and terminals;

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of communicationbetween the base station and terminals;

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of communicationbetween the base station and terminals;

FIG. 20 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of communicationbetween the base station and terminals;

FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a relation of a plurality of modulatedsignals;

FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of communicationbetween the base station and a terminal;

FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of performingcommunication between the base station and a terminal;

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating examples of symbols which the basestation and a terminal transmit;

FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating examples of symbols which the basestation transmits;

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of communicationbetween the base station and terminals;

FIG. 27 is a diagram illustrating examples of symbols which the basestation transmits;

FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of performingcommunication between the base station and a terminal;

FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state of communicationbetween the base station and terminals;

FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of performingcommunication between the base station and a terminal;

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating examples of symbols which the basestation transmits;

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating examples of symbols which the basestation transmits;

FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of performingcommunication between the base station and a terminal;

FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of performingcommunication between the base station and a terminal;

FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating examples of symbols which the basestation transmits;

FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of performingcommunication between the base station and a terminal;

FIG. 37 illustrates an example of a configuration of the base station;

FIG. 38 illustrates an example of a frame configuration;

FIG. 39 illustrates an example of a frame configuration;

FIG. 40 illustrates an example of a frame configuration;

FIG. 41 illustrates an example of a frame configuration;

FIG. 42 illustrates an example of allocation of symbol areas toterminals;

FIG. 43 illustrates an example of allocation of symbol areas toterminals;

FIG. 44 illustrates an example of a configuration of the base station;

FIG. 45 illustrates an example of a case in which data held by acommunication device is transmitted to a plurality of communicationdevices;

FIG. 46 illustrates one example of spectrums;

FIG. 47 illustrates one example of a positional relationship betweencommunication devices;

FIG. 48 illustrates another example of a positional relationship betweencommunication devices;

FIG. 49 illustrates another example of a positional relationship betweencommunication devices;

FIG. 50 illustrates another example of a positional relationship betweencommunication devices;

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by a communication device;

FIG. 52 illustrates another example of a frame configuration of amodulated signal transmitted by a communication device;

FIG. 53 illustrates an example of a configuration of a communicationdevice;

FIG. 54 illustrates one example of communication between communicationdevices;

FIG. 55 illustrates one example of a procedure for communicationperformed by each communication device;

FIG. 56 illustrates another example of a procedure for communicationperformed by each communication device;

FIG. 57 illustrates an example of a configuration of a communicationdevice and a power transmission device;

FIG. 58 illustrates an example of a configuration of a device;

FIG. 59 illustrates one example of a procedure for communicationperformed by each device;

FIG. 60 illustrates one example of a procedure for communication betweena device and a server;

FIG. 61 illustrates a problem related to the arrangement ofcommunication antennas;

FIG. 62 illustrates one example of an arrangement of communicationantennas;

FIG. 63 illustrates another example of an arrangement of communicationantennas;

FIG. 64 illustrates another example of an arrangement of communicationantennas;

FIG. 65 illustrates another example of an arrangement of communicationantennas;

FIG. 66 illustrates another example of an arrangement of communicationantennas;

FIG. 67 illustrates another example of an arrangement of communicationantennas;

FIG. 68 illustrates another example of an arrangement of communicationantennas;

FIG. 69 illustrates the principle behind line scan sampling;

FIG. 70 illustrates one example of a captured image when exposure timeis long;

FIG. 71 illustrates one example of a captured image when exposure timeis short;

FIG. 72A is for illustrating a 4PPM modulation scheme;

FIG. 72B is for illustrating Manchester coding scheme;

FIG. 73 illustrates an example of a configuration of a visible lightcommunication system; and

FIG. 74 illustrates an example of a configuration of anothercommunication system that performs optical communication.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE EMBODIMENTS Embodiment 1

FIG. 1 illustrates an example of a configuration of a base station (oran access point, for instance) in the present embodiment.

101-1 denotes #1 information, 101-2 denotes #2 information, ..., and101-M denotes #M information. 101-i denotes #i information, where i isan integer of 1 or greater and M or smaller. Note that M is an integergreater than or equal to 2. Note that not all the information items from#1 information to #M information are necessarily present.

Signal processor 102 receives inputs of #1 information 101-1, #2information 101-2, ..., #M information 101-M, and control signal 159.Signal processor 102 performs signal processing based on informationincluded in control signal 159 such as “information on a method of errorcorrection coding (a coding rate, a code length (block length))”,“information on a modulation method”, “information on precoding”, “atransmitting method (multiplexing method)”, “whether to performtransmission for multicasting or transmission for unicasting(transmission for multicasting and transmission for unicasting may becarried out simultaneously)”, “the number of transmission streams whenmulticasting is performed”, and “a transmitting method performed whentransmitting a modulated signal for multicasting (this point will belater described in detail)”, and outputs signal 103-1 obtained as aresult of the signal processing, signal 103-2 obtained as a result ofthe signal processing, ..., and signal 103-M obtained as a result of thesignal processing, that is, signal 103-i obtained as a result of thesignal processing. Note that not all the signals from signal #1 obtainedas a result of the signal processing to signal #M obtained as a resultof the signal processing are necessarily present. At this time, signalprocessor 102 performs error correction coding on #i information 101-i,and thereafter maps resultant information according to a modulationmethod which has been set, thus obtaining a baseband signal.

Signal processor 102 collects baseband signals corresponding toinformation items, and precodes the baseband signals. For example,orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) may be applied.

Wireless communication unit 104-1 receives inputs of signal 103-1obtained as a result of the signal processing and control signal 159.Wireless communication unit 104-1 performs processing such as bandlimiting, frequency conversion, and amplification, based on controlsignal 159, and outputs transmission signal 105-1. Then, transmissionsignal 105-1 is output as a radio wave from antenna unit 106-1.

Similarly, wireless communication unit 104-2 receives inputs of signal103-2 obtained as a result of the signal processing and control signal159. Wireless communication unit 104-2 performs processing such as bandlimiting, frequency conversion, and amplification, based on controlsignal 159, and outputs transmission signal 105-2. Then, transmissionsignal 105-2 is output as a radio wave from antenna unit 106-2. Adescription of wireless communication unit 104-3 to wirelesscommunication unit 104-(M-1) is omitted.

Wireless communication unit 104-M receives inputs of signal 103-Mobtained as a result of the signal processing and control signal 159.Wireless communication unit 104-M performs processing such as bandlimiting, frequency conversion, and amplification, based on controlsignal 159, and outputs transmission signal 105-M. Then, transmissionsignal 105-M is output as a radio wave from antenna unit 106-M.

Note that the wireless communication units may not perform the aboveprocessing when a signal obtained as a result of the signal processingis not present.

Wireless communication unit group 153 receives inputs of received signalgroup 152 received by receiving antenna group 151. Wirelesscommunication unit group 153 performs processing such as frequencyconversion and outputs baseband signal group 154.

Signal processor 155 receives an input of baseband signal group 154, andperforms demodulation and error correction decoding, and thus alsoperforms processing such as time synchronization, frequencysynchronization, and channel estimation. At this time, signal processor155 receives modulated signals transmitted by one or more terminals andperforms processing, and thus obtains data transmitted by the one ormore terminals and control information transmitted by the one or moreterminals. Accordingly, signal processor 155 outputs data group 156corresponding to the one or more terminals, and control informationgroup 157 corresponding to the one or more terminals.

Setting unit 158 receives inputs of control information group 157 andsetting signal 160. Setting unit 158 determines, based on controlinformation group 157, “a method of error correction coding (a codingrate, a code length (block length))”, “a modulation method”, “aprecoding method”, “a transmitting method”, “antenna settings”, “whetherto perform transmission for multicasting or transmission for unicasting(transmission for multicasting and transmission for unicasting may becarried out simultaneously)”, “the number of transmission streams whenmulticasting is performed”, and “a transmitting method performed whentransmitting a modulated signal for multicasting”, for instance, andoutputs control signal 159 that includes such information itemsdetermined.

Antenna units 106-1, 106-2, ..., and 106-M each receive an input ofcontrol signal 159. The operation at this time is to be described withreference to FIG. 2 .

FIG. 2 illustrates an example of a configuration of antenna units 106-1,106-2, ..., and 106-M. Each antenna unit includes a plurality ofantennas, as illustrated in FIG. 2 . Note that FIG. 2 illustrates fourantennas, yet each antenna unit may include at least two antennas. Notethat the number of antennas is not limited to 4.

FIG. 2 illustrates a configuration of antenna unit 106-i, where i is aninteger of 1 or greater and M or smaller.

Splitter 202 receives an input of transmission signal 201 (correspondingto transmission signal 105-i in FIG. 1 ). Splitter 202 splitstransmission signal 201, and outputs signals 203-1, 203-2, 203-3, and203-4.

Multiplier 204-1 receives inputs of signal 203-1 and control signal 200(corresponding to control signal 159 in FIG. 1 ). Multiplier 204-1multiplies signal 203-1 by coefficient W1, based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 200, and outputssignal 205-1 obtained as a result of the multiplication. Note thatcoefficient W1 can be defined by a complex number. Accordingly, W1 canalso be a real number. Thus, if signal 203-1 is v1(t), signal 205-1obtained as a result of the multiplication can be expressed by W1 ×v1(t) (t denotes time). Then, signal 205-1 obtained as a result of themultiplication is output as a radio wave from antenna 206-1.

Similarly, multiplier 204-2 receives inputs of signal 203-2 and controlsignal 200. Multiplier 204-2 multiplies signal 203-2 by coefficient W2,based on information on a multiplication coefficient included in controlsignal 200, and outputs signal 205-2 obtained as a result of themultiplication. Note that coefficient W2 can be defined by a complexnumber. Accordingly, W2 can also be a real number. Thus, if signal 203-2is v2(t), signal 205-2 obtained as a result of the multiplication can beexpressed by W2 × v2(t) (t denotes time). Then, signal 205-2 obtained asa result of the multiplication is output as a radio wave from antenna206-2.

Multiplier 204-3 receives inputs of signal 203-3 and control signal 200.Multiplier 204-3 multiplies signal 203-3 by coefficient W3, based oninformation on a multiplication coefficient included in control signal200, and outputs signal 205-3 obtained as a result of themultiplication. Note that coefficient W3 can be defined by a complexnumber. Accordingly, W3 can also be a real number. Thus, if signal 203-3is expressed by v3(t), signal 205-3 obtained as a result of themultiplication can be expressed by W3 × v3(t) (t denotes time). Then,signal 205-3 obtained as a result of the multiplication is output as aradio wave from antenna 206-3.

Multiplier 204-4 receives inputs of signal 203-4 and control signal 200.Multiplier 204-2 multiplies signal 203-4 by coefficient W4, based oninformation on a multiplication coefficient included in control signal200, and outputs signal 205-4 obtained as a result of themultiplication. Note that coefficient W4 can be defined by a complexnumber. Accordingly, W4 can also be a real number. Thus, if signal 203-4is v4(t), signal 205-4 obtained as a result of the multiplication can beexpressed by W4 × v4(t) (t denotes time). Then, signal 205-4 obtained asa result of the multiplication is output as a radio wave from antenna206-4.

Note that the absolute value of W1, the absolute value of W2, theabsolute value of W3, and the absolute value of W4 may be equal to oneanother.

FIG. 3 illustrates a configuration of the base station different fromthe configuration of the base station in FIG. 1 in the presentembodiment. In FIG. 3 , the same reference numerals are assigned toelements which operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 1 , and adescription thereof is omitted below.

Weighting synthesizer 301 receives inputs of modulated signal 105-1,modulated signal 105-2, ..., modulated signal 105-M, and control signal159. Then, weighting synthesizer 301 weighting synthesizes modulatedsignal 105-1, modulated signal 105-2, ..., and modulated signal 105-M,based on information on weighting synthesis included in control signal159, and outputs signals 302-1, 302-2, ..., and 302-K obtained as aresult of the weighting synthesis. K is an integer of 1 or greater.Signal 302-1 obtained as a result of the weighting synthesis is outputas a radio wave from antenna 303-1, signal 302-2 obtained as a result ofthe weighting synthesis is output as a radio wave from antenna 303-2,..., and signal 302-K obtained as a result of the weighting synthesis isoutput as a radio wave from antenna 303-K.

Signal y_(i)(t) 302-i (i is an integer of 1 or greater and K or smaller)obtained as a result of the weighting synthesis is expressed as follows(t denotes time). [Math. 1]

$\begin{matrix}\begin{matrix}{y_{i}(t) = A_{i1} \times x_{1}(t) + A_{i2} \times x_{2}(t) + \cdots + A_{iM} \times x_{M}(t)} \\{= {\sum\limits_{j = 1}^{M}{A_{ij} \times x_{j}(t)}}}\end{matrix} & \text{­­­Expression (1)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Expression (1), A_(ij) is a value which can be defined by acomplex number. Accordingly, A_(ij) can also be a real number, andx_(j)(t) is modulated signal 105-j, where j is an integer of 1 orgreater and M or smaller.

FIG. 4 illustrates an example of a configuration of a terminal. Antennaunits 401-1, 401-2, ..., and 401-N each receive an input of controlsignal 410, where N is an integer of 1 or greater.

Wireless communication unit 403-1 receives inputs of received signal402-1 received by antenna unit 401-1 and control signal 410. Based oncontrol signal 410, wireless communication unit 403-1 performsprocessing such as frequency conversion on received signal 402-1, andoutputs baseband signal 404-1.

Similarly, wireless communication unit 403-2 receives inputs of receivedsignal 402-2 received by antenna unit 401-2 and control signal 410.Based on control signal 410, wireless communication unit 403-2 performsprocessing such as frequency conversion on received signal 402-2, andoutputs baseband signal 404-2. Note that a description of wirelesscommunication units 403-3 to 403-(N-1) is omitted.

Wireless communication unit 403-N receives inputs of received signal402-N received by antenna unit 401-N and control signal 410. Based oncontrol signal 410, wireless communication unit 403-N performsprocessing such as frequency conversion on received signal 402-N, andoutputs baseband signal 404-N.

Note that not all of wireless communication units 403-1, 403-2, ..., and403-N may operate. Accordingly, not all of baseband signals 404-1,404-2, ..., and 404-N are necessarily present.

Signal processor 405 receives inputs of baseband signals 404-1, 404-2,..., 404-N, and control signal 410. Based on control signal 410, signalprocessor 405 performs demodulation and error correction decodingprocessing, and outputs data 406, control information 407 fortransmission, and control information 408. Specifically, signalprocessor 405 also performs processing such as time synchronization,frequency synchronization, and channel estimation.

Setting unit 409 receives an input of control information 408. Settingunit 409 performs setting with regard to a receiving method, and outputscontrol signal 410.

Signal processor 452 receives inputs of information 451 and controlinformation 407 for transmission. Signal processor 452 performsprocessing such as error correction coding and mapping according to amodulation method which has been set, and outputs baseband signal group453.

Wireless communication unit group 454 receives an input of basebandsignal group 453. Wireless communication unit group 454 performsprocessing such as band limiting, frequency conversion, andamplification, and outputs transmission signal group 455. Transmissionsignal group 455 is output as a radio wave from transmitting antennagroup 456.

FIG. 5 illustrates an example of a configuration of antenna units 401-1,401-2, ..., and 401-N. Each antenna unit includes a plurality ofantennas, as illustrated in FIG. 5 . Note that FIG. 5 illustrates fourantennas, yet each antenna unit may include at least two antennas. Notethat the number of antennas included in each antenna unit is not limitedto 4.

FIG. 5 illustrates a configuration of antenna unit 401-i, where i is aninteger of 1 or greater and N or smaller.

Multiplier 503-1 receives inputs of received signal 502-1 received byantenna 501-1 and control signal 500 (corresponding to control signal410 in FIG. 4 ). Multiplier 503-1 multiplies received signal 502-1 bycoefficient D1, based on information on a multiplication coefficientincluded in control signal 500, and outputs signal 504-1 obtained as aresult of the multiplication. Note that coefficient D1 can be defined bya complex number. Accordingly, D1 can also be a real number. Thus, ifreceived signal 502-1 is expressed by e1(t), signal 504-1 obtained as aresult of the multiplication can be expressed by D1 × e1(t) (t denotestime).

Similarly, multiplier 503-2 receives inputs of received signal 502-2received by antenna 501-2 and control signal 500. Based on informationon a multiplication coefficient included in control signal 500,multiplier 503-2 multiplies received signal 502-2 by coefficient D2, andoutputs signal 504-2 obtained as a result of the multiplication. Notethat coefficient D2 can be defined by a complex number. Accordingly, D2can also be a real number. Thus, if received signal 502-2 is expressedby e2(t), signal 504-2 obtained as a result of the multiplication can beexpressed by D2 × e2(t) (t denotes time).

Multiplier 503-3 receives inputs of received signal 502-3 received byantenna 501-3 and control signal 500. Based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 500, multiplier503-3 multiplies received signal 502-3 by coefficient D3, and outputssignal 504-3 obtained as a result of the multiplication. Note thatcoefficient D3 can be defined by a complex number. Accordingly, D3 canalso be a real number. Thus, if received signal 502-3 is expressed bye3(t), signal 504-3 obtained as a result of the multiplication can beexpressed by D3 × e3(t) (t denotes time).

Multiplier 503-4 receives inputs of received signal 502-4 received byantenna 501-4 and control signal 500. Based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 500, multiplier503-4 multiplies received signal 502-4 by coefficient D4, and outputssignal 504-4 obtained as a result of the multiplication. Note thatcoefficient D4 can be defined by a complex number. Accordingly, D4 canalso be a real number. Thus, if received signal 502-4 is expressed by e4(t), signal 504-4 obtained as a result of the multiplication can beexpressed by D4 × e4(t) (t denotes time).

Synthesizer 505 receives inputs of signals 504-1, 504-2, 504-3, and504-4 obtained as a result of the multiplication. Synthesizer 505 addssignals 504-1, 504-2, 504-3, and 504-4 obtained as a result of themultiplication, and outputs synthesized signal 506 (corresponding toreceived signal 402-i in FIG. 4 ). Thus, synthesized signal 506 isexpressed by D1 × e1(t) + D2 × e2(t) + D3 × e3(t) + D4 × e4(t).

FIG. 6 illustrates a configuration of a terminal different from theconfiguration of the terminal in FIG. 4 in the present embodiment.Elements which operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 4 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 6 , and a descriptionthereof is omitted below.

Multiplier 603-1 receives inputs of received signal 602-1 received byantenna 601-1 and control signal 410. Based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 410, multiplier603-1 multiplies received signal 602-1 by coefficient G1, and outputssignal 604-1 obtained as a result of the multiplication. Note thatcoefficient G1 can be defined by a complex number. Accordingly, G1 canalso be a real number. Thus, if received signal 602-1 is expressed byc1(t), signal 604-1 obtained as a result of the multiplication can beexpressed by G1 × c1(t) (t denotes time).

Similarly, multiplier 603-2 receives inputs of received signal 602-2received by antenna 601-2 and control signal 410. Based on informationon a multiplication coefficient included in control signal 410,multiplier 603-2 multiplies received signal 602-2 by coefficient G2, andoutputs signal 604-2 obtained as a result of the multiplication. Notethat coefficient G2 can be defined by a complex number. Accordingly, G2can also be a real number. Thus, if received signal 602-2 is expressedby c2(t), signal 604-2 obtained as a result of the multiplication can beexpressed by G2 × c2(t) (t denotes time). A description of multiplier603-3 to multiplier 603-(L-1) is omitted.

Multiplier 603-L receives inputs of received signal 602-L received byantenna 601-L and control signal 410. Based on information on amultiplication coefficient included in control signal 410, multiplier603-L multiplies received signal 602-L by coefficient GL, and outputssignal 604-L obtained as a result of the multiplication. Note thatcoefficient GL can be defined by a complex number. Accordingly, GL canalso be a real number. Thus, if received signal 602-L is expressed bycL(t), signal 604-L obtained as a result of the multiplication can beexpressed by GL × cL(t) (t denotes time).

Accordingly, multiplier 603-i receives inputs of received signal 602-ireceived by antenna 601-i and control signal 410. Based on informationon a multiplication coefficient included in control signal 410,multiplier 603-i multiplies received signal 602-i by coefficient Gi, andoutputs signal 604-i obtained as a result of the multiplication. Notethat coefficient Gi can be defined by a complex number. Accordingly, Gican also be a real number. Thus, if received signal 602-i is expressedby ci (t), signal 604-i obtained as a result of the multiplication canbe expressed by Gi × ci(t) (t denotes time). Note that i is an integerof 1 or greater and L or smaller, and L is an integer of 2 or greater.

Processor 605 receives inputs of signals 604-1, 604-2, ..., and 604-Lobtained as a result of the multiplication and control signal 410. Basedon control signal 410, processor 605 performs signal processing, andoutputs signals 606-1, 606-2, ..., and 606-N obtained as a result of thesignal processing, where N is an integer of 2 or greater. At this time,signal 604-i obtained as a result of the multiplication is expressed byp_(i)(t) (i is an integer of 1 or greater and L or smaller). Then,signal 606-j (r_(j)(t)) as a result of the processing is expressed asfollows (j is an integer of 1 or greater and N or smaller). [Math. 2]

$\begin{matrix}\begin{matrix}{r_{j}(t) = B_{j1} \times p_{1}(t) + B_{j2} \times p_{2}(t) + \cdots + B_{jL} \times p_{L}(t)} \\{= {\sum\limits_{i = 1}^{L}B_{ji}} \times p_{i}(t)}\end{matrix} & \text{­­­Expression (2)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Expression (2), B_(ji) is a value which can be defined by acomplex number. Accordingly, B_(ji) can also be a real number.

FIG. 7 illustrates an example of a state of communication between thebase station and terminals. Note that the base station may be referredto as an access point or a broadcast station, for instance.

Base station 700 includes a plurality of antennas, and transmits aplurality of transmission signals from antenna 701 for transmission. Atthis time, base station 700 has a configuration as illustrated in FIGS.1 or 3 , for example, and performs transmission beamforming (directivitycontrol) by signal processor 102 (and/or weighting synthesizer 301)performing precoding (weighting synthesis).

FIG. 7 illustrates transmission beam 702-1 for transmitting data ofstream 1, transmission beam 702-2 for transmitting data of stream 1, andtransmission beam 702-3 for transmitting data of stream 1.

FIG. 7 illustrates transmission beam 703-1 for transmitting data ofstream 2, transmission beam 703-2 for transmitting data of stream 2, andtransmission beam 703-3 for transmitting data of stream 2.

Note that in FIG. 7 , the number of transmission beams for transmittingdata of stream 1 is 3 and the number of transmission beams fortransmitting data of stream 2 is 3, yet the present disclosure is notlimited to such numbers. The number of transmission beams fortransmitting data of stream 1 may be at least two, and the number oftransmission beams for transmitting data of stream 2 may be at leasttwo.

FIG. 7 includes terminals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4, and 704-5, and theterminals have the configuration same as the configuration of theterminals illustrated in FIGS. 4 and 5 , for example.

For example, terminal 704-1 performs directivity control for receiving,via “signal processor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or“multipliers 603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receivingdirectivity 705-1 and receiving directivity 706-1. Receiving directivity705-1 allows terminal 704-1 to receive and demodulate transmission beam702-1 for transmitting data of stream 1, and receiving directivity 706-1allows terminal 704-1 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 703-1for transmitting data of stream 2.

Similarly, terminal 704-2 performs directivity control for receiving,via “signal processor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or“multipliers 603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receivingdirectivity 705-2 and receiving directivity 706-2. Receiving directivity705-2 allows terminal 704-2 to receive and demodulate transmission beam702-1 for transmitting data of stream 1, and receiving directivity 706-2allows terminal 704-2 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 703-1for transmitting data of stream 2.

Terminal 704-3 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity 705-3and receiving directivity 706-3.

Receiving directivity 705-3 allows terminal 704-3 to receive anddemodulate transmission beam 702-2 for transmitting data of stream 1,and receiving directivity 706-3 allows terminal 704-3 to receive anddemodulate transmission beam 703-2 for transmitting data of stream 2.

Terminal 704-4 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity 705-4and receiving directivity 706-4. Receiving directivity 705-4 allowsterminal 704-4 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 702-3 fortransmitting data of stream 1, and receiving directivity 706-4 allowsterminal 704-4 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 703-2 fortransmitting data of stream 2.

Terminal 704-5 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity 705-5and receiving directivity 706-5. Receiving directivity 705-5 allowsterminal 704-5 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 702-3 fortransmitting data of stream 1, and receiving directivity 706-5 allowsterminal 704-5 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 703-3 fortransmitting data of stream 2.

In FIG. 7 , a terminal selects, according to a spatial position, atleast one transmission beam from among transmission beams 702-1, 702-2,and 702-3 for transmitting data of stream 1, and can obtain data ofstream 1 with high quality by directing a receiving directivity to theselected transmission beam(s). Furthermore, the terminal selects,according to a spatial position, at least one transmission beam fromamong transmission beams 703-1, 703-2, and 703-3 for transmitting dataof stream 2, and can obtain data of stream 2 with high quality bydirecting a receiving directivity to the selected transmission beam(s).

Note that base station 700 transmits transmission beam 702-1 fortransmitting data of stream 1 and transmission beam 703-1 fortransmitting data of stream 2, using the same frequency (the samefrequency band) at the same time. Base station 700 transmitstransmission beam 702-2 for transmitting data of stream 1 andtransmission beam 703-2 for transmitting data of stream 2, using thesame frequency (the same frequency band) at the same time. Base station700 transmits transmission beam 702-3 for transmitting data of stream 1and transmission beam 703-3 for transmitting data of stream 2, using thesame frequency (the same frequency band) at the same time.

Transmission beams 702-1, 702-2, and 702-3 for transmitting data ofstream 1 may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequencyband) or may be beams having different frequencies (different frequencybands). Transmission beams 703-1, 703-2, and 703-3 for transmitting dataof stream 2 may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequencyband), or may be beams having different frequencies (different frequencybands).

A description of operation of setting unit 158 of the base station inFIGS. 1 and 3 is to be given.

Setting unit 158 receives an input of setting signal 160. Setting signal160 includes information with regard to “whether to perform transmissionfor multicasting or transmission for unicasting”, and if the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 7 , informationindicating “to perform transmission for multicasting” is input tosetting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 includes information with regard to “the number oftransmission streams when multicasting is performed” and if the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 7 , informationindicating that “the number of transmission streams is 2” is input tosetting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 may include information with regard to “how manytransmission beams are to be used to transmit each stream”. If the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 7 , informationindicating that “the number of transmission beams for transmittingstream 1 is 3 and the number of transmission beams for transmittingstream 2 is 3” is input to setting unit 158 according to setting signal160.

Note that the base station in FIGS. 1 and 3 may transmit a controlinformation symbol which includes, for instance, information with regardto “whether to perform transmission for multicasting or transmission forunicasting”, information with regard to “the number of transmissionstreams when multicasting is performed”, information with regard to “howmany transmission beams are to be used to transmit each stream”.Accordingly, a terminal can appropriately receive data. A configurationof a control information symbol will be later described in detail.

FIG. 8 is a drawing for describing a relation between #i information101-i in FIGS. 1 and 3 and “stream 1” and “stream 2” described withreference to FIG. 7 . For example, processing such as error correctioncoding is performed on #1 information 101-1, and data obtained as aresult of the error correction coding is obtained. The data obtained asa result of the error correction coding is named #1 transmission data.Data symbols are obtained by mapping #1 transmission data. By separatingdata symbols into data symbols for stream 1 and data symbols for stream2, data symbols (data symbol group) for stream 1 and data symbols (datasymbol group) for stream 2 are obtained. The symbol group for stream 1includes data symbols (data symbol group) for stream 1, and istransmitted from the base station in FIGS. 1 and 3 . The symbol groupfor stream 2 includes data symbols (data symbol group) for stream 2, andis transmitted from the base station in FIGS. 1 and 3 .

FIG. 9 illustrates an example of a frame configuration when thehorizontal axis indicates time.

#1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1 in FIG. 9 is a symbol group fortransmission beam 702-1 for transmitting data of stream 1 in FIG. 7 .

#2 symbol group 901-2 for stream 1 in FIG. 9 is a symbol group fortransmission beam 702-2 for transmitting data of stream 1 in FIG. 7 .

#3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1 in FIG. 9 is a symbol group fortransmission beam 702-3 for transmitting data of stream 1 in FIG. 7 .

#1 symbol group 902-1 for stream 2 in FIG. 9 is a symbol group fortransmission beam 703-1 for transmitting data of stream 2 in FIG. 7 .

#2 symbol group 902-2 for stream 2 in FIG. 9 is a symbol group fortransmission beam 703-2 for transmitting data of stream 2 in FIG. 7 .

#3 symbol group 902-3 for stream 2 in FIG. 9 is a symbol group fortransmission beam 703-3 for transmitting data of stream 2 in FIG. 7 .

#1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1, #2 symbol group 901-2 for stream 1,#3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1, #1 symbol group 902-1 for stream 2,#2 symbol group 902-2 for stream 2, and #3 symbol group 902-3 for stream2 are present in time interval 1, for example.

As described above, #1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1 and #2 symbolgroup 902-1 for stream 2 are transmitted using the same frequency (thesame frequency band), #2 symbol group 901-2 for stream 1 and #2 symbolgroup 902-2 for stream 2 are transmitted using the same frequency (thesame frequency band), and #3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1 and #3symbol group 902-3 for stream 2 are transmitted using the same frequency(the same frequency band).

For example, “data symbol group A for stream 1” and “data symbol group Afor stream 2” are generated from information, following the procedure inFIG. 8 . The symbol group, namely “data symbol group A-1 for stream 1”which includes the same symbols as symbols included in “data symbolgroup A for stream 1”, the symbol group, namely “data symbol group A-2for stream 1” which includes the same symbols as symbols included in“data symbol group A for stream 1”, and the symbol group, namely “datasymbol group A-3 for stream 1” which includes the same symbols assymbols included in “data symbol group A for stream 1” are prepared.

Thus, the symbols included in “data symbol group A-1 for stream 1”, thesymbols included in “data symbol group A-2 for stream 1”, and thesymbols included in “data symbol group A-3 for stream 1” are the same.

At this time, #1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1 in FIG. 9 includes“data symbol group A-1 for stream 1”, #2 symbol group 901-2 for stream 1in FIG. 9 includes “data symbol group A-2 for stream 1”, and #3 symbolgroup 901-3 for stream 1 in FIG. 9 includes “data symbol group A-3 forstream 1”. Accordingly, #1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1, #2 symbolgroup 901-2 for stream 1, and #3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1 includethe same data symbol group.

The symbol group, namely “data symbol group A-1 for stream 2” whichincludes the same symbols as symbols included in “data symbol group Afor stream 2”, the symbol group, namely “data symbol group A-2 forstream 2” which includes the same symbols as symbols included in “datasymbol group A for stream 2”, and the symbol group, namely “data symbolgroup A-3 for stream 2” which includes the same symbols as symbolsincluded in “data symbol group A for stream 2” are prepared.

Accordingly, the symbols included in “data symbol group A-1 for stream2”, the symbols included in “data symbol group A-2 for stream 2”, andthe symbols included in “data symbol group A-3 for stream 2” are thesame.

At this time, #1 symbol group 902-1 for stream 2 in FIG. 9 includes“data symbol group A-1 for stream 2”, #2 symbol group 902-2 for stream 2in FIG. 9 includes “data symbol group A-2 for stream 2”, and #3 symbolgroup 902-3 for stream 2 in FIG. 9 includes “data symbol group A-3 forstream 2”. Accordingly, #1 symbol group 902-1 for stream 2, #2 symbolgroup 902-2 for stream 2, and #3 symbol group 902-3 for stream 2 includethe same data symbol group.

FIG. 10 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of “symbol group#Y for stream X” (X = 1, 2; Y = 1, 2, 3) described with reference toFIG. 9 . In FIG. 10 , while the horizontal axis indicates time, 1001denotes a control information symbol and 1002 denotes a data symbolgroup for a stream. At this time, data symbol group 1002 for the streamincludes symbols for transmitting “data symbol group A for stream 1” or“data symbol group A for stream 2” described with reference to FIG. 9 .

Note that a multi-carrier method such as the orthogonal frequencydivision multiplexing (OFDM) method may be used for the frameconfiguration in FIG. 10 , and symbols may be present in the directionof the frequency axis, in this case. The symbols may include a referencesymbol for a receiving device to perform time synchronization andfrequency synchronization, a reference symbol for a receiving device todetect a signal, and a reference symbol for a receiving device toperform channel estimation, for instance. The frame configuration is notlimited to the configuration in FIG. 10 , and control information symbol1001 and data symbol group 1002 for a stream may be arranged in anymanner. Note that the reference symbol may be referred to as a preambleand a pilot symbol.

The following describes a configuration of control information symbol1001.

FIG. 11 illustrates an example of a configuration of symbols transmittedas a control information symbol in FIG. 10 , and the horizontal axisindicates time. In FIG. 11 , a terminal receives “training symbol for aterminal to perform receiving directivity control” 1101 to determine asignal processing method for the directivity control for receiving,which is implemented by “signal processor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to401-N” and/or “multipliers 603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”.

A terminal receives “symbol for notifying the number of transmissionstreams when multicasting is performed” 1102 so that the terminal isinformed of the number of streams to be obtained.

A terminal receives “symbol for notifying for which stream data symbolsare” 1103 so that the terminal can be informed which stream has beensuccessfully received among the streams which the base station istransmitting.

A description of an example with regard to the above is to be given.

The case where the base station transmits streams using transmissionbeams as illustrated in FIG. 7 is to be described. Specific informationindicated by a control information symbol in #1 symbol group 901-1 forstream 1 in FIG. 9 is to be described.

In the case of FIG. 7 , since the base station is transmitting “stream1” and “stream 2”, information indicated by “symbol for notifying thenumber of transmission streams when multicasting is performed” 1102indicates “2”.

#1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1 in FIG. 9 is for transmitting datasymbols for stream 1, and thus information indicated by “symbol fornotifying for which stream data symbols are” 1103 indicates “stream 1”.

The case where, for example, a terminal receives #1 symbol group 901-1for stream 1 in FIG. 9 is to be described. At this time, the terminalbecomes aware that “the number of transmission streams is 2” from“symbol for notifying the number of transmission streams whenmulticasting is performed” 1102, and that the terminal has obtained“data symbols for stream 1” from “symbol 1103 for notifying for whichstream data symbol group includes data symbols”.

After that, since the terminal becomes aware that “the number oftransmission streams is 2” and the obtained data symbols are “datasymbols for stream 1”, the terminal is aware that the terminal is toobtain “data symbols for stream 2”. Thus, the terminal can startoperation for searching for a symbol group for stream 2. For example,the terminal searches for one of transmission beams for transmitting #1symbol group 902-1 for stream 2, #2 symbol group 902-2 for stream 2, and#3 symbol group 902-3 for stream 2 in FIG. 9 .

Then, the terminal obtains one of transmission beams for transmitting #1symbol group 902-1 for stream 2, #2 symbol group 902-2 for stream 2, and#3 symbol group 902-3 for stream 2, to obtain data symbols for bothstreams 1 and 2.

Configuring control information symbols in this manner yields anadvantageous effect that a terminal can obtain data symbols precisely.

As described above, the base station transmits data symbols using aplurality of transmission beams, and a terminal selectively receives atransmission beam with good quality among the plurality of transmissionbeams in multicast transmission and broadcast data transmission, andfurthermore, transmission directivity control and receiving directivitycontrol have been performed on modulated signals transmitted by the basestation, thus achieving advantageous effects of increasing an area wherehigh data receiving quality is achieved.

In the above description, a terminal performs receiving directivitycontrol, yet advantageous effects can be obtained as mentioned abovewithout the terminal performing receiving directivity control.

Note that the modulating method for “data symbol group for a stream”1002 in FIG. 10 may be any modulating method, and a mapping methodaccording to the modulating method for “data symbol group for a stream”1002 may be changed for each symbol. Accordingly, a phase of aconstellation may be changed for each symbol on an in-phase I-quadratureQ plane after mapping.

FIG. 12 illustrates an example of a state of communication between abase station and terminals different from the example in FIG. 7 . Notethat elements which operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 7 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 12 .

Base station 700 includes a plurality of antennas, and transmits aplurality of transmission signals through antenna 701 for transmission.At this time, base station 700 has a configuration as illustrated in,for example, FIGS. 1 or 3 , and performs transmission beamforming(directivity control) by signal processor 102 (and/or weightingsynthesizer 301) performing precoding (weighting synthesis).

FIG. 12 illustrates transmission beam 1202-1 for transmitting “modulatedsignal 1”, transmission beam 1202-2 for transmitting “modulated signal1”, and transmission beam 1202-3 for transmitting “modulated signal 1”.

FIG. 12 illustrates transmission beam 1203-1 for transmitting “modulatedsignal 2”, transmission beam 1203-2 for transmitting “modulated signal2”, and transmission beam 1203-3 for transmitting “modulated signal 2”.

Note that although in FIG. 12 , the number of transmission beams fortransmitting “modulated signal 1” is 3 and the number of transmissionbeams for transmitting “modulated signal 2” is 3, the present disclosureis not limited to such numbers, and the number of transmission beams fortransmitting “modulated signal 1” may be at least 2 and the number oftransmission beams for transmitting “modulated signal 2” may be at least2. A detailed description of “modulated signal 1” and “modulated signal2” will be given later.

FIG. 12 includes terminals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4, and 704-5, andthe terminals have the same configuration as those in FIGS. 4 and 5 ,for example.

For example, terminal 704-1 performs directivity control for receiving,via “signal processor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or“multipliers 603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receivingdirectivity 705-1 and receiving directivity 706-1. Receiving directivity705-1 allows terminal 704-1 to receive and demodulate transmission beam1202-1 for transmitting “modulated signal 1”, and receiving directivity706-1 allows terminal 704-1 to receive and demodulate transmission beam1203-1 for transmitting “modulated signal 2”.

Similarly, terminal 704-2 performs directivity control for receiving,via “signal processor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or“multipliers 603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receivingdirectivity 705-2 and receiving directivity 706-2. Receiving directivity705-2 allows terminal 704-2 to receive and demodulate transmission beam1202-1 for transmitting “modulated signal 1”, and receiving directivity706-2 allows terminal 704-2 to receive and demodulate transmission beam1203-1 for transmitting “modulated signal 2”.

Terminal 704-3 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity 705-3and receiving directivity 706-3.

Receiving directivity 705-3 allows terminal 704-3 to receive anddemodulate transmission beam 1202-2 for transmitting “modulated signal1”, and receiving directivity 706-3 allows terminal 704-3 to receive anddemodulate transmission beam 1203-2 for transmitting “modulated signal2”.

Terminal 704-4 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity 705-4and receiving directivity 706-4. Receiving directivity 705-4 allowsterminal 704-4 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 1202-3 fortransmitting “modulated signal 1”, and receiving directivity 706-4allows terminal 704-4 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 1203-2for transmitting “modulated signal 2”.

Terminal 704-5 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity 705-5and receiving directivity 706-5. Receiving directivity 705-5 allowsterminal 704-5 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 1202-3 fortransmitting “modulated signal 1”, and receiving directivity 706-5allows terminal 704-5 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 1203-3for transmitting “modulated signal 2”.

Distinguishing points in FIG. 12 are that a terminal selects, based on aspatial position, at least one transmission beam from among transmissionbeams 1202-1, 1202-2, and 1202-3 for transmitting “modulated signal 1”,and can obtain “modulated signal 1” with high quality by directing areceiving directivity to the selected transmission beam(s). Further, theterminal selects, based on a spatial position, at least one transmissionbeam from among transmission beams 1203-1, 1203-2, and 1203-3 fortransmitting “modulated signal 2”, and can obtain “modulated signal 2”with high quality by directing a receiving directivity to the selectedtransmission beam(s).

Note that base station 700 transmits transmission beam 1202-1 fortransmitting “modulated signal 1” and transmission beam 1203-1 fortransmitting “modulated signal 2” using the same frequency (the samefrequency band) at the same time. Then, base station 700 transmitstransmission beam 1202-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 1” andtransmission beam 1203-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 2” using thesame frequency (the same frequency band) at the same time. Further, basestation 700 transmits transmission beam 1202-3 for transmitting“modulated signal 1” and transmission beam 1203-3 for transmitting“modulated signal 2” using the same frequency (the same frequency band)at the same time.

Transmission beams 1202-1, 1202-2, and 1202-3 for transmitting“modulated signal 1” may be beams having the same frequency (the samefrequency band) or may be beams having different frequencies (differentfrequency bands). Transmission beams 1203-1, 1203-2, and 1203-3 fortransmitting “modulated signal 2” may be beams having the same frequency(the same frequency band) or may be beams having different frequencies(different frequency bands).

A description of operation of setting unit 158 of the base station inFIGS. 1 and 3 is to be given.

Setting unit 158 receives an input of setting signal 160. Setting signal160 includes information with regard to “whether to perform transmissionfor multicasting or transmission for unicasting”, and if the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 12 , informationindicating “to perform transmission for multicasting” is input tosetting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 includes information with regard to “the number oftransmission modulated signals when multicasting is performed” and ifthe base station performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 12 ,information indicating that “the number of transmission modulatedsignals is 2” is input to setting unit 158 according to setting signal160.

Setting signal 160 may include information with regard to “how manytransmission beams are to be used to transmit each modulated signal”. Ifthe base station performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 12 ,information indicating that “the number of transmission beams fortransmitting modulated signal 1 is 3 and the number of transmissionbeams for transmitting modulated signal 2 is 3” is input to setting unit158 according to setting signal 160.

Note that the base station in FIGS. 1 and 3 may transmit a controlinformation symbol which includes, for instance, information with regardto “whether to perform transmission for multicasting or transmission forunicasting”, information with regard to “the number of transmissionmodulated signals when multicasting is performed”, information withregard to “how many transmission beams are to be used to transmit eachmodulated signal”. Accordingly, a terminal can appropriately receivedata. A configuration of a control information symbol will be laterdescribed in detail.

FIG. 13 is a drawing for describing a relation between #i information101-i in FIGS. 1 and 3 and “modulated signal 1” and “modulated signal 2”described with reference to FIG. 12 .

For example, #1 information 101-1 is subjected to error correctioncoding, for instance, and data obtained as a result of the errorcorrection coding is obtained. The data obtained as a result of theerror correction coding is named #1 transmission data. Data symbols areobtained by mapping #1 transmission data. The data symbols are separatedinto data symbols for stream 1 and data symbols for stream 2, so thatdata symbols (data symbol group) for stream 1 and data symbols (datasymbol group) for stream 2 are obtained. At this time, a data symbolhaving symbol number i for stream 1 is s1(i) and a data symbol havingsymbol number i for stream 2 is s2(i). Then, “modulated signal 1” tx1(i)having symbol number i is expressed as follows, for example. [Math. 3]

$\begin{matrix}{tx1(i) = \alpha(i) \times s1(i) + \beta(i) \times s2(i)} & \text{­­­Expression (3)}\end{matrix}$

Then, “modulated signal 2” tx2(i) having symbol number i is expressed asfollows, for example. [Math. 4]

$\begin{matrix}{tx2(i) = \gamma(i) \times s1(i) + \delta(i) \times s2(i)} & \text{­­­Expression (4)}\end{matrix}$

Note that in Expressions (3) and (4), a(i) can be defined by a complexnumber (and thus may be a real number), B(i) can be defined by a complexnumber (and thus may be a real number), y(i) can be defined by a complexnumber (and thus may be a real number), and δ(i) can be defined by acomplex number (and thus may be a real number). Furthermore, althougha(i) is indicated, a(i) may not be a function of symbol number i (may bea fixed value), although β(i) is indicated, B(i) may not be a functionof symbol number i (may be a fixed value), although y(i) is indicated,y(i) may not be a function of symbol number i (may be a fixed value),and although δ(i) is indicated, δ(i) may not be a function of symbolnumber i (may be a fixed value).

Then, “a symbol group for modulated signal 1” which includes “signals ina data transmission area of modulated signal 1” which are constituted bydata symbols is transmitted from the base station in FIGS. 1 or 3 .Further, “a symbol group for modulated signal 2” which includes “signalsin a data transmission area of modulated signal 2” which are constitutedby data symbols is transmitted from the base station in FIGS. 1 or 3 .

Note that signal processing such as phase modification and cyclic delaydiversity (CDD) may be performed on “modulated signal 1” and “modulatedsignal 2”. Note that the method for signal processing is not limited tothose.

FIG. 14 illustrates an example of a frame configuration when thehorizontal axis indicates time.

#1 symbol group (1401-1) for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 is a symbolgroup for transmission beam 1202-1 for transmitting data of modulatedsignal 1 in FIG. 12 .

#2 symbol group (1401-2) for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 is a symbolgroup for transmission beam 1202-2 for transmitting data of modulatedsignal 1 in FIG. 12 .

#3 symbol group (1401-3) for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 is a symbolgroup for transmission beam 1202-3 for transmitting data of modulatedsignal 1 in FIG. 12 .

#1 symbol group (1402-1) for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 is a symbolgroup for transmission beam 1203-1 for transmitting data of modulatedsignal 2 in FIG. 12 .

#2 symbol group (1402-2) for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 is a symbolgroup for transmission beam 1203-2 for transmitting data of modulatedsignal 2 in FIG. 12 .

#3 symbol group (1402-3) for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 is a symbolgroup for transmission beam 1203-3 for transmitting data of modulatedsignal 2 in FIG. 12 .

#1 symbol group (1401-1) for modulated signal 1, #2 symbol group(1401-2) for modulated signal 1, #3 symbol group (1401-3) for modulatedsignal 1, #1 symbol group (1402-1) for modulated signal 2, #2 symbolgroup (1402-2) for modulated signal 2, and #3 symbol group (1402-3) formodulated signal 2 are present in time interval 1, for example.

As previously described, #1 symbol group (1401-1) for modulated signal 1and #1 symbol group (1402-1) for modulated signal 2 are transmittedusing the same frequency (the same frequency band), #2 symbol group(1401-2) for modulated signal 1 and #2 symbol group (1402-2) formodulated signal 2 are transmitted using the same frequency (the samefrequency band), and #3 symbol group (1401-3) for modulated signal 1 and#3 symbol group (1402-3) for modulated signal 2 are transmitted usingthe same frequency (the same frequency band).

For example, “signal A in the data transmission area of modulated signal1” and “signal A in the data transmission area of modulated signal 2”are generated from information in accordance with the procedure in FIG.13 .

“Signal A-1 in the data transmission area of modulated signal 1” whichis a signal constituted by a signal equivalent to a signal whichconstitutes “signal A in the data transmission area of modulated signal1”, “signal A-2 in the data transmission area of modulated signal 1”which is a signal constituted by a signal equivalent to a signal whichconstitutes “signal A in the data transmission area of modulated signal1”, and “signal A-3 in the data transmission area of modulated signal 1”which is a signal constituted by a signal equivalent to a signal whichconstitutes “signal A in the data transmission area of modulated signal1” are prepared (thus, the signal which constitutes “signal A-1 in thedata transmission area of modulated signal 1”, the signal whichconstitutes “signal A-2 in the data transmission area of modulatedsignal 1”, and the signal which constitutes “signal A-3 in the datatransmission area of modulated signal 1” are the same).

At this time, #1 symbol group (1401-1) for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14includes “signal A-1 in the data transmission area of modulated signal1”, #2 symbol group (1401-2) for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 includes“signal A-2 in the data transmission area of modulated signal 1”, and #3symbol group (1401-3) for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 includes “signalA-3 in the data transmission area of modulated signal 1”. Specifically,#1 symbol group (1401-1) for modulated signal 1, #2 symbol group(1401-2) for modulated signal 1, and #3 symbol group (1401-3) formodulated signal 1 include equivalent signals.

Further, “signal A-1 in the data transmission area of modulated signal2” which is a signal constituted by a signal equivalent to a signalwhich constitutes “signal A in the data transmission area of modulatedsignal 2”, “signal A-2 in the data transmission area of modulated signal2” which is a signal constituted by a signal equivalent to a signalwhich constitutes “signal A in the data transmission area of modulatedsignal 2”, and “signal A-3 in the data transmission area of modulatedsignal 2” which is a signal constituted by a signal equivalent to asignal which constitutes “signal A in the data transmission area ofmodulated signal 2” are prepared (thus, the signal which constitutes“signal A-1 in the data transmission area of modulated signal 2”, thesignal which constitutes “signal A-2 in the data transmission area ofmodulated signal 2”, and the signal which constitutes “signal A-3 in thedata transmission area of modulated signal 2” are the same).

At this time, #1 symbol group (1402-1) for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 14includes “signal A-1 in the data transmission area of modulated signal2”, #2 symbol group (1402-2) for stream 2 in FIG. 14 includes “signalA-2 in the data transmission area of modulated signal 2”, and #3 symbolgroup (1402-3) for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 includes “signal A-3 inthe data transmission area of modulated signal 2”. Specifically, #1symbol group (1402-1) for modulated signal 2, #2 symbol group (1402-2)for modulated signal 2, and #3 symbol group (1402-3) for modulatedsignal 2 include equivalent signals.

FIG. 15 illustrates an example of a frame configuration of “symbol group#Y for modulated signal X” (X = 1, 2; Y = 1, 2, 3) described withreference to FIG. 14 . In FIG. 15 , the horizontal axis indicates time,1501 indicates a control information symbol, and 1502 indicates amodulated signal transmission area for data transmission. At this time,modulated signal transmission area 1502 for data transmission includessymbols for transmitting “signal A in the data transmission area ofmodulated signal 1” or “signal A in the data transmission area ofmodulated signal 2” described with reference to FIG. 14 .

Note that in the frame configuration in FIG. 15 , a multi-carrier methodsuch as an orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) method maybe used, and in this case, symbols may be present in the direction ofthe frequency axis. The symbols may each include a reference symbol fora receiving device to perform time synchronization and frequencysynchronization, a reference symbol for a receiving device to detect asignal, and a reference symbol for a receiving device to perform channelestimation, for instance. The frame configuration is not limited to theconfiguration in FIG. 15 , and control information symbol 1501 andmodulated signal transmission area 1502 for data transmission may bearranged in any manner. A reference symbol may also be called a preambleand a pilot symbol, for example.

Next is a description of a configuration of control information symbol1501.

FIG. 16 illustrates an example of a configuration of symbols which areto be transmitted as a control information symbol in FIG. 15 , and thehorizontal axis indicates time. In FIG. 16 , 1601 denotes “a trainingsymbol for a terminal to perform receiving directivity control”, and theterminal determines a signal processing method for the directivitycontrol for receiving, which is performed by “signal processor 405”and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers 603-1 to 603-L andprocessor 605”, by receiving “training symbol for a terminal to performreceiving directivity control” 1601.

1602 denotes “a symbol for notifying the number of transmissionmodulated signals when multicasting is performed”, and the terminal isinformed of the number of modulated signals which are to be obtained, byreceiving “symbol for notifying the number of transmission modulatedsignals when multicasting is performed” 1602.

1603 denotes “a symbol for notifying of which modulated signal amodulated signal transmission area for data transmission is”, and theterminal can be informed of which modulated signal has been successfullyreceived among modulated signals which the base station is transmitting,by receiving “symbol for notifying of which modulated signal a modulatedsignal transmission area for data transmission is” 1603.

An example of the above is to be described.

Now consider the case where the base station is transmitting “modulatedsignals” using transmission beams as illustrated in FIG. 12 . Specificinformation on a control information symbol in #1 symbol group 1401-1for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 is to be described.

In the case of FIG. 12 , the base station is transmitting “modulatedsignal 1” and “modulated signal 2”, and thus information indicated by“symbol for notifying the number of transmission modulated signals whenmulticasting is performed” 1602 is “2”.

#1 symbol group 1401-1 for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 is fortransmitting a signal in the data transmission area of modulated signal1, and thus information indicated by “symbol for notifying of whichmodulated signal a modulated signal transmission area for datatransmission is” 1603 indicates “modulated signal 1”.

For example, a terminal is assumed to receive #1 symbol group 1401-1 formodulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 . At this time, the terminal becomes awarethat “the number of modulated signals is 2” is obtained from “symbol fornotifying the number of transmission modulated signals when multicastingis performed” 1602, and that “modulated signal 1” from “symbol fornotifying of which modulated signal a modulated signal transmission areafor data transmission is” 1603.

The terminal then becomes aware that “the number of present modulatedsignals is 2” and that the obtained modulated signal is “modulatedsignal 1”, and thus the terminal is aware that “modulated signal 2” isto be obtained. Accordingly, the terminal can start operation ofsearching for “modulated signal 2”. The terminal searches for one oftransmission beams for any of “#1 symbol group 1402-1 for modulatedsignal 2”, “#2 symbol group 1402-2 for modulated signal 2”, “#3 symbolgroup 1402-3 for modulated signal 2” in FIG. 14 , for example.

The terminal obtains both “modulated signal 1” and “modulated signal 2”,and can obtain data symbols for stream 1 and data symbols for stream 2with high quality, by obtaining one transmission beam for “#1 symbolgroup 1402-1 for modulated signal 2”, “#2 symbol group 1402-2 formodulated signal 2”, and “#3 symbol group 1402-3 for modulated signal2”.

Configuring a control information symbol in the above manner yieldsadvantageous effects that the terminal can precisely obtain datasymbols.

As described above, in multicast data transmission and broadcast datatransmission, the base station transmits data symbols using a pluralityof transmission beams, and a terminal selectively receives atransmission beam with good quality among the plurality of transmissionbeams, thus achieving advantageous effects that a modulated signal whichthe base station has transmitted increases an area where high datareceiving quality is achieved. This is because the base station performstransmission directivity control and receiving directivity control.

In the above description, a terminal performs receiving directivitycontrol, yet advantageous effects can be obtained as mentioned abovewithout the terminal performing receiving directivity control.

Note that the case where each terminal obtains both a modulated signalof stream 1 and a modulated signal of stream 2 is described withreference to FIG. 7 , yet the present disclosure is not limited to suchan embodiment. For example, an embodiment in which a modulated signaldesired to be obtained varies depending on a terminal may be achieved asin a case where there are a terminal which desires to obtain a modulatedsignal of stream 1, a terminal which desires to obtain a modulatedsignal of stream 2, and a terminal which desires to obtain both amodulated signal of stream 1 and a modulated signal of stream 2.

Embodiment 2

Embodiment 1 has described a method in which a base station transmitsdata symbols using a plurality of transmission beams in multicast datatransmission and broadcast data transmission. The present embodimentdescribes, as a variation of Embodiment 1, the case where a base stationperforms unicast data transmission as well as multicast datatransmission and broadcast data transmission.

FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a state of communication between thebase station (or an access point, for instance) and terminals. Elementswhich operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 7 are assigned thesame reference numerals, and a detailed description thereof is omitted.

Base station 700 includes a plurality of antennas, and transmits aplurality of transmission signals through antenna 701 for transmission.At this time, base station 700 has a configuration as illustrated in,for example, FIGS. 1 or 3 , and performs transmission beamforming(directivity control) by signal processor 102 (and/or weightingsynthesizer 301) performing precoding (weighting synthesis).

Then, transmission beams 702-1, 702-2, 702-3, 703-1, 703-2, and 703-3are as described with reference to FIG. 7 , and thus a descriptionthereof is omitted.

Terminals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4, and 704-5, and receivingdirectivities 705-1, 705-2, 705-3, 705-4, 705-5, 706-1, 706-2, 706-3,706-4, and 706-5 are as described with reference to FIG. 7 , and thus adescription thereof is omitted.

In FIG. 17 , a distinguishing point is that the base station performsmulticasting, as described with reference to FIG. 7 , and also basestation 700 and a terminal (for example, 1702) perform unicastcommunication.

In addition to transmission beams for multicasting 702-1, 702-2, 702-3,703-1, 703-2, and 703-3, in FIG. 17 , base station 700 generatestransmission beam 1701 for unicasting, and transmits to terminal 1702data therefor. Note that FIG. 17 illustrates an example in which basestation 700 transmits one transmission beam 1701 to terminal 1702. Yet,the number of transmission beams is not limited to one, and base station700 may transmit a plurality of transmission beams to terminal 1702 (maytransmit a plurality of modulated signals).

Terminal 1702 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and signal processor 605”, and forms receivingdirectivity 1703. This allows terminal 1702 to receive and demodulatetransmission beam 1701.

Note that in order to generate transmission beams which includetransmission beam 1701, the base station performs precoding (weightingsynthesis) using signal processor 102 (and/or weighting synthesizer 301)in the configuration as illustrated in FIGS. 1 or 3 , for example.

On the contrary, when terminal 1702 transmits a modulated signal to basestation 700, terminal 1702 performs precoding (or weighting synthesis),and transmits transmission beam 1703. Base station 700 performsdirectivity control for receiving and forms receiving directivity 1701.Accordingly, base station 700 can receive and demodulate transmissionbeam 1703.

Note that base station 700 transmits transmission beam 702-1 fortransmitting data of stream 1 and transmission beam 703-1 fortransmitting data of stream 2, using the same frequency (the samefrequency band) at the same time. Base station 700 transmitstransmission beam 702-2 for transmitting data of stream 1 andtransmission beam 703-2 for transmitting data of stream 2, using thesame frequency (the same frequency band) at the same time. Further, basestation 700 transmits transmission beam 702-3 for transmitting data ofstream 1 and transmission beam 703-3 for transmitting data of stream 2,using the same frequency (the same frequency band) at the same time.

Transmission beams 702-1, 702-2, and 702-3 for transmitting data ofstream 1 may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequencyband), or may be beams having different frequencies (different frequencybands). Transmission beams 703-1, 703-2, and 703-3 for transmitting dataof stream 2 may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequencyband), or may be beams having different frequencies (different frequencybands).

Then, transmission beam 1701 for unicasting may be a beam having thesame frequency (the same frequency band) as or a different frequency (adifferent frequency band) from those of transmission beams 702-1, 702-2,702-3, 703-1, 703-2, and 703-3.

A description has been given with reference to FIG. 17 , assuming that aterminal which performs unicast communication is a single terminal, yetthe number of terminals which perform unicast communication with thebase station may be two or more.

Operation of setting unit 158 at this time in the base station havingthe configuration illustrated in FIGS. 1 or 3 is described.

Setting unit 158 receives an input of setting signal 160. Setting signal160 includes information with regard to “whether to perform transmissionfor multicasting or transmission for unicasting”, and if the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 17 , informationindicating “to perform both transmission for multicasting andtransmission for unicasting” is input to setting unit 158 according tosetting signal 160.

Also, setting signal 160 includes information with regard to “the numberof transmission streams when multicasting is performed” and if the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 17 , informationindicating that “the number of transmission streams is 2” is input tosetting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 may include information with regard to “how manytransmission beams are to be used to transmit each stream”. If the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 17 , informationindicating that “the number of transmission beams for transmittingstream 1 is 3 and the number of transmission beams for transmittingstream 2 is 3” is input to setting unit 158 according to setting signal160.

Note that the base station in FIGS. 1 and 3 may transmit a controlinformation symbol which includes information with regard to “whether toperform transmission for multicasting or transmission for unicasting”,information with regard to “the number of transmission streams whenmulticasting is performed”, information with regard to “how manytransmission beams are to be used to transmit each stream”, and others.Accordingly, a terminal can appropriately receive data.

Furthermore, the base station may transmit, to a terminal with which thebase station performs unicast communication, a control informationsymbol for training for the base station to perform directivity control,and a control information symbol for training for a terminal to performdirectivity control.

FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a state of communication between abase station (or an access point or the like) and terminals, andelements which operate in the same manner as those in FIGS. 7 and 12 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 18 , and a detaileddescription thereof is omitted.

Base station 700 includes a plurality of antennas, and transmits aplurality of transmission signals from antenna 701 for transmission. Atthis time, base station 700 has a configuration as illustrated in, forexample, FIGS. 1 or 3 , and performs transmission beamforming(directivity control) by signal processor 102 (and/or weightingsynthesizer 301) performing precoding (weighting synthesis).

A description of transmission beams 1202-1, 1202-2, 1202-3, 1203-1,1203-2, and 1203-3 is as described with reference to FIG. 12 , and thusa description thereof is omitted.

A description of terminals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4, and 704-5, andreceiving directivities 705-1, 705-2, 705-3, 705-4, 705-5, 706-1, 706-2,706-3, 706-4, and 706-5 is as given with reference to FIG. 12 , and thusa description thereof is omitted.

A distinguishing point in FIG. 18 is that while the base stationperforms multicasting, as described with reference to FIG. 12 , basestation 700 and a terminal (for example, 1702) perform unicastcommunication.

In FIG. 18 , base station 700 generates transmission beam 1701 forunicasting in addition to transmission beams 1202-1, 1202-2, 1202-3,1203-1, 1203-2, and 1203-3 for multicasting, and transmits to terminal1702 data therefor. Note that FIG. 18 illustrates an example in whichbase station 700 transmits one transmission beam 1701 to terminal 1702,yet the number of transmission beams is not limited to one, and basestation 700 may transmit a plurality of transmission beams to terminal1702 (may transmit a plurality of modulated signals).

Terminal 1702 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and signal processor 605”, and forms receivingdirectivity 1703. Accordingly, terminal 1702 can receive and demodulatetransmission beam 1701.

Note that in order to generate transmission beams which includetransmission beam 1701, the base station performs precoding (weightingsynthesis) in signal processor 102 (and/or, weighting synthesizer 301)in the configuration as illustrated in, for example, FIGS. 1 or 3 .

On the contrary, when terminal 1702 transmits a modulated signal to basestation 700, terminal 1702 performs precoding (or weighting synthesis),and transmits transmission beam 1703, and base station 700 performsdirectivity control for receiving, and forms receiving directivity 1701.Accordingly, base station 700 can receive and demodulate transmissionbeam 1703.

Note that base station 700 transmits transmission beam 1202-1 fortransmitting “modulated signal 1” and transmission beam 1203-1 fortransmitting “modulated signal 2”, using the same frequency (the samefrequency band) at the same time. Then, base station 700 transmitstransmission beam 1202-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 1” andtransmission beam 1203-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 2”, usingthe same frequency (the same frequency band) at the same time. Further,base station 700 transmits transmission beam 1202-3 for transmitting“modulated signal 1” and transmission beam 1203-3 for transmitting“modulated signal 2”, using the same frequency (the same frequency band)at the same time.

Transmission beams 1202-1, 1202-2, and 1202-3 for transmitting“modulated signal 1” may be beams having the same frequency (the samefrequency band) or may be beams having different frequencies (differentfrequency bands). Transmission beams 1203-1, 1203-2, and 1203-3 fortransmitting “modulated signal 2” may be beams having the same frequency(the same frequency band) or may be beams having different frequencies(different frequency bands).

Transmission beam 1701 for unicasting may be a beam having the samefrequency (the same frequency band) as or a different frequency(different frequency band) from those of transmission beams 1202-1,1202-2, 1202-3, 1203-1, 1203-2, and 1203-3.

A description has been given with reference to FIG. 18 , assuming that aterminal which performs unicast communication is a single terminal, yetthe number of terminals which perform unicast communication with thebase station may be two or more.

Operation of setting unit 158 at this time in the base station havingthe configuration illustrated in FIGS. 1 or 3 is described.

Setting unit 158 receives an input of setting signal 160. Setting signal160 includes information with regard to “whether to perform transmissionfor multicasting or transmission for unicasting”, and if the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 18 , informationindicating “to perform both transmission for multicasting andtransmission for unicasting” is input to setting unit 158 according tosetting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 also includes information with regard to “the numberof transmission streams when multicasting is performed” and if the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 18 , informationindicating that “the number of transmission streams is 2” is input tosetting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 may include information with regard to “how manytransmission beams are to be used to transmit each stream”. If the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 18 , informationindicating that “the number of transmission beams for transmittingstream 1 is 3 and the number of transmission beams for transmittingstream 2 is 3” is input to setting unit 158 according to setting signal160.

Note that the base station in FIGS. 1 and 3 may transmit a controlinformation symbol which includes information with regard to “whether toperform transmission for multicasting or transmission for unicasting”,information with regard to “the number of transmission streams whenmulticasting is performed”, and information with regard to “how manytransmission beams are to be used to transmit each stream”, forinstance. Accordingly, a terminal can appropriately receive data.

Furthermore, the base station may transmit, to a terminal with which thebase station performs unicast communication, a control informationsymbol for training for the base station to perform directivity control,and a control information symbol for training for a terminal to performdirectivity control.

The following describes the case where the base station transmits aplurality of data by multicasting, as a variation of Embodiment 1.

FIG. 19 illustrates an example of a state of communication between thebase station (or an access point, for instance) and terminals, andelements which operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 7 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 19 , so that a detaileddescription thereof is omitted.

Base station 700 includes a plurality of antennas, and transmits aplurality of transmission signals through antenna 701 for transmission.At this time, base station 700 has a configuration as illustrated in,for example, FIGS. 1 or 3 , and performs transmission beamforming(directivity control) by signal processor 102 (and/or weightingsynthesizer 301) performing precoding (weighting synthesis).

A description of transmission beams 702-1, 702-2, 702-3, 703-1, 703-2,and 703-3 is as given with reference to FIG. 7 , and thus a descriptionthereof is omitted.

A description of terminals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4, and 704-5 andreceiving directivities 705-1, 705-2, 705-3, 705-4, 705-5, 706-1, 706-2,706-3, 706-4, and 706-5 is as described with reference to FIG. 7 , andthus a description thereof is omitted.

Base station 700 transmits transmission beams 1901-1, 1901-2, 1902-1,and 1902-2, in addition to transmission beams 702-1, 702-2, 702-3,703-1, 703-2, and 703-3.

Transmission beam 1901-1 is a transmission beam for transmitting data ofstream 3. Transmission beam 1901-2 is also a transmission beam fortransmitting data of stream 3.

Transmission beam 1902-1 is a transmission beam for transmitting data ofstream 4. Transmission beam 1902-2 is also a transmission beam fortransmitting data of stream 4.

Reference numerals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4, 704-5, 1903-1, 1903-2,and 1903-3 denote terminals, and each have a configuration asillustrated in FIGS. 4 and 5 , for example. Note that operation ofterminals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4, and 704-5 is as described withreference to FIG. 7 .

Terminal 1903-1 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity1904-1 and receiving directivity 1905-1. Receiving directivity 1904-1allows terminal 1903-1 to receive and demodulate transmission beam1901-2 for transmitting data of stream 3, and receiving directivity1905-1 allows terminal 1903-1 to receive and demodulate transmissionbeam 1902-2 for transmitting data of stream 4.

Terminal 1903-2 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity1904-2 and receiving directivity 1905-2. Receiving directivity 1904-2allows terminal 1903-2 to receive and demodulate transmission beam1902-1 for transmitting data of stream 4, and receiving directivity1905-2 allows terminal 1903-2 to receive and demodulate transmissionbeam 1901-2 for transmitting data of stream 3.

Terminal 1903-3 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity1904-3 and receiving directivity 1905-3. Receiving directivity 1904-3allows terminal 1903-3 to receive and demodulate transmission beam1901-1 for transmitting data of stream 3, and receiving directivity1905-3 allows terminal 1903-3 to receive and demodulate transmissionbeam 1902-1 for transmitting data of stream 4.

Terminal 1903-4 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity1904-4 and receiving directivity 1905-4. Receiving directivity 1904-4allows terminal 1903-4 to receive and demodulate transmission beam 703-1for transmitting data of stream 2, and receiving directivity 1905-4allows terminal 1903-4 to receive and demodulate transmission beam1901-1 for transmitting data of stream 3.

In FIG. 19 , a distinguishing point is that the base station transmits aplurality of streams each including data for multicasting, and alsotransmits each stream using a plurality of transmission beams, and eachterminal selectively receives one or more transmission beams for onemore streams among a plurality of streams.

Note that base station 700 transmits transmission beam 702-1 fortransmitting data of stream 1 and transmission beam 703-1 fortransmitting data of stream 2, using the same frequency (the samefrequency band) at the same time. Base station 700 transmitstransmission beam 702-2 for transmitting data of stream 1 andtransmission beam 703-2 for transmitting data of stream 2, using thesame frequency (the same frequency band) at the same time. Further, basestation 700 transmits transmission beam 702-3 for transmitting data ofstream 1 and transmission beam 703-3 for transmitting data of stream 2,using the same frequency (the same frequency band) at the same time.

Base station 700 transmits transmission beam 1901-1 for transmittingdata of stream 3 and transmission beam 1902-1 for transmitting data ofstream 4, using the same frequency (the same frequency band) at the sametime. Base station 700 transmits transmission beam 1901-2 fortransmitting data of stream 3 and transmission beam 1902-2 fortransmitting data of stream 4, using the same frequency (the samefrequency band) at the same time.

Transmission beams 702-1, 702-2, and 702-3 for transmitting data ofstream 1 may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequencyband), or may be beams having different frequencies (different frequencybands). Transmission beams 703-1, 703-2, and 703-3 for transmitting dataof stream 2 may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequencyband), or may be beams having different frequencies (different frequencybands).

Transmission beams 1901-1 and 1901-2 for transmitting data of stream 3may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequency band), or maybe beams having different frequencies (different frequency bands).Transmission beams 1902-1 and 1902-2 for transmitting data of stream 4may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequency band), or maybe beams having different frequencies (different frequency bands).

Then, data symbols for stream 1 and data symbols for stream 2 may begenerated from #1 information 101-1 in FIG. 1 , and data symbols forstream 3 and data symbols for stream 4 may be generated from #2information 101-2. Note that error correction coding may be performed oneach of #1 information 101-1 and #2 information 101-2, and thereafterdata symbols may be generated therefrom.

Data symbols for stream 1 may be generated from #1 information 101-1 inFIG. 1 , data symbols for stream 2 may be generated from #2 information101-2 in FIG. 1 , data symbols for stream 3 may be generated from #3information 101-3 in FIG. 1 , and data symbols for stream 4 may begenerated from #4 information 101-4 in FIG. 1 . Note that errorcorrection coding may be performed on each of#1 information 101-1, #2information 101-2, #3 information 101-3, and #4 information 101-4, andthereafter data symbols may be generated therefrom.

Specifically, data symbols for streams may be generated from any of theinformation in FIG. 1 . This yields advantageous effect that a terminalcan selectively obtain a stream for multicasting.

Operation of setting unit 158 at this time in the base station havingthe configuration illustrated in FIGS. 1 or 3 is to be described.Setting unit 158 receives an input of setting signal 160. Setting signal160 includes information with regard to “whether to perform transmissionfor multicasting or transmission for unicasting”, and if the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 19 , informationindicating “to perform transmission for multicasting” is input tosetting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 includes information with regard to “the number oftransmission streams when multicasting is performed” and if the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 19 , informationindicating that “the number of transmission streams is 4” is input tosetting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 may include information with regard to “how manytransmission beams are to be used to transmit each stream”. If the basestation performs transmission as illustrated in FIG. 19 , informationindicating that “the number of transmission beams for transmittingstream 1 is 3, the number of transmission beams for transmitting stream2 is 3, the number of transmission beams for transmitting stream 3 is 2,and the number of transmission beams for transmitting stream 4 is 2” isinput to setting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Note that the base station in FIGS. 1 and 3 may transmit a controlinformation symbol which includes, for instance, information with regardto “whether to perform transmission for multicasting or transmission forunicasting”, information with regard to “the number of transmissionstreams when multicasting is performed”, and information with regard to“how many transmission beams are to be used to transmit each stream”.Accordingly, a terminal can appropriately receive data.

The following describes the case where the base station transmits aplurality of data by multicasting, as a variation of Embodiment 1.

FIG. 20 illustrates an example of a state of communication between thebase station (or an access point, for instance) and terminals, andelements which operate in the same manner as those in FIGS. 7, 12, and19 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 20 , so that adetailed description thereof is omitted.

Base station 700 includes a plurality of antennas, and transmits aplurality of transmission signals from antenna 701 for transmission. Atthis time, base station 700 has a configuration as illustrated in, forexample, FIGS. 1 or 3 , and performs transmission beamforming(directivity control) by signal processor 102 (and/or weightingsynthesizer 301) performing precoding (weighting synthesis).

A description of transmission beams 1202-1, 1202-2, 1202-3, 1203-1,1203-2, and 1203-3 overlaps a description given with reference to FIG.12 , and thus a description thereof is omitted.

A description of terminals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4, and 704-5, andreceiving directivity 705-1, 705-2, 705-3, 705-4, 705-5, 706-1, 706-2,706-3, 706-4, and 706-5 overlaps a description given with reference toFIG. 12 , and thus a description thereof is omitted.

Base station 700 transmits transmission beams 2001-1, 2001-2, 2002-1,and 2002-2, in addition to transmission beams 1202-1, 1202-2, 1202-3,1203-1, 1203-2, and 1203-3.

Transmission beam 2001-1 is a transmission beam for transmitting“modulated signal 3”. Transmission beam 2001-2 is also a transmissionbeam for transmitting “modulated signal 3”.

Transmission beam 2002-1 is a transmission beam for transmitting“modulated signal 4”. Transmission beam 2002-2 is also a transmissionbeam for transmitting “modulated signal 4”.

Terminals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4, 704-5, 1903-1, 1903-2, and 1903-3have the same configuration as those illustrated in FIGS. 4 and 5 , forexample. Note that operation of terminals 704-1, 704-2, 704-3, 704-4,and 704-5 is the same as a description given with reference to FIG. 7 .

Terminal 1903-1 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity1904-1 and receiving directivity 1905-1. Receiving directivity 1904-1allows terminal 1903-1 to receive and demodulate transmission beam2001-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 3”, and receiving directivity1905-1 allows terminal 1903-1 to receive and demodulate transmissionbeam 2002-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 4”.

Terminal 1903-2 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity1904-2 and receiving directivity 1905-2. Receiving directivity 1904-2allows terminal 1903-2 to receive and demodulate transmission beam2002-1 for transmitting “modulated signal 4”, and receiving directivity1905-2 allows terminal 1903-2 to receive and demodulate transmissionbeam 2001-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 3”.

Terminal 1903-3 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity1904-3 and receiving directivity 1905-3. Receiving directivity 1904-3allows terminal 1903-3 to receive and demodulate transmission beam2001-1 for transmitting “modulated signal 3”, and receiving directivity1905-3 allows terminal 1903-3 to receive and demodulate transmissionbeam 2002-1 for transmitting “modulated signal 4”.

Terminal 1903-4 performs directivity control for receiving, via “signalprocessor 405” and/or “antennas 401-1 to 401-N” and/or “multipliers603-1 to 603-L and processor 605”, and forms receiving directivity1904-4 and receiving directivity 1905-4. Receiving directivity 1904-4allows terminal 1903-4 to receive and demodulate transmission beam2001-1 for transmitting “modulated signal 3”, and receiving directivity1905-4 allows terminal 1903-4 to receive and demodulate transmissionbeam 2002-1 for transmitting “modulated signal 4”.

In FIG. 20 , the base station transmits a plurality of modulated signalseach including data for multicasting, and transmits each modulatedsignal using a plurality of transmission beams. Each terminalselectively receives one or more transmission beams used to transmit oneor more streams among the plurality of modulated signals.

Note that base station 700 transmits transmission beam 1202-1 fortransmitting “modulated signal 1” and transmission beam 1203-1 fortransmitting “modulated signal 2”, using the same frequency (the samefrequency band) at the same time. Then, base station 700 transmitstransmission beam 1202-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 1” andtransmission beam 1203-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 2”, usingthe same frequency (the same frequency band) at the same time. Further,base station 700 transmits transmission beam 1202-3 for transmitting“modulated signal 1” and transmission beam 1203-3 for transmitting“modulated signal 2”, using the same frequency (the same frequency band)at the same time.

Base station 700 transmits transmission beam 2001-1 for transmitting“modulated signal 3” and transmission beam 2002-1 for transmitting“modulated signal 4”, using the same frequency (the same frequency band)at the same time. Then, base station 700 transmits transmission beam2001-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 3” and transmission beam2002-2 for transmitting “modulated signal 4”, using the same frequency(the same frequency band) at the same time.

Transmission beams 702-1, 702-2, and 702-3 for transmitting data ofstream 1 may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequencyband), or may be beams having different frequencies (different frequencybands). Transmission beams 703-1, 703-2, and 703-3 for transmitting dataof stream 2 may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequencyband), or may be beams having different frequencies (different frequencybands).

Transmission beams 2001-1 and 2001-2 for transmitting “modulated signal3” may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequency band) ormay be beams having different frequencies (different frequency bands).Transmission beams 2002-1 and 2002-2 for transmitting “modulated signal4” may be beams having the same frequency (the same frequency band) ormay be beams having different frequencies (different frequency bands).

Operation of setting unit 158 at this time in the base station havingthe configuration illustrated in FIGS. 1 or 3 is to be described.Setting unit 158 receives an input of setting signal 160. Setting signal160 includes information with regard to “whether to perform transmissionfor multicasting or transmission for unicasting”, and if the basestation performs transmission illustrated in FIG. 19 , informationindicating “to perform transmission for multicasting” is input tosetting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 includes information with regard to “the number oftransmission modulated signals when multicasting is performed”, and ifthe base station performs transmission illustrated in FIG. 20 ,information indicating “the number of transmission modulated signals is4” is input to setting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Setting signal 160 may include information with regard to “how manytransmission beams are to be used to transmit each modulated signal”.When the base station performs transmission illustrated in FIG. 20 ,information indicating that “the number of transmission beams fortransmitting modulated signal 1 is 3, the number of transmission beamsfor transmitting modulated signal 2 is 3, the number of transmissionbeams for transmitting modulated signal 3 is 2, and the number oftransmission beams for transmitting modulated signal 4 is 2” is input tosetting unit 158 according to setting signal 160.

Note that the base station in FIGS. 1 and 3 may transmit a controlinformation symbol which includes, for instance, information with regardto “whether to perform transmission for multicasting or transmission forunicasting”, information with regard to “the number of transmissionstreams when multicasting is performed”, information with regard to “howmany transmission beams are to be used to transmit each stream”.Accordingly, a terminal can appropriately receive data.

Note that in FIG. 20 , if a terminal receives both a transmission beamfor “modulated signal 1”, and a transmission beam for “modulated signal2”, the terminal can obtain data of stream 1 and data of stream 2 withhigh receiving quality.

Similarly, if a terminal receives both a transmission beam for“modulated signal 3”, and a transmission beam for “modulated signal 4”,the terminal can obtain data of stream 3 and data of stream 4 with highreceiving quality.

FIG. 20 illustrates an example in which the base station transmits“modulated signal 1”, “modulated signal 2”, “modulated signal 3”, and“modulated signal 4”, yet the base station may transmit “modulatedsignal 5” and “modulated signal 6” for transmitting data of stream 5 anddata of stream 6, respectively, and may transmit more modulated signalsin order to transmit more streams. Note that the base station transmitseach of the modulated signals using one or more transmission beams.

Furthermore, as described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18 , one ormore transmission beams for unicasting (or receiving directivitycontrol) may be present.

A description of a relation between “modulated signal 1” and “modulatedsignal 2” overlaps a description with reference to FIG. 13 , and thusthe description thereof is omitted. Here, a description of a relationbetween “modulated signal 3” and “modulated signal 4” is given withreference to FIG. 21 .

For example, #2 information 101-2 is subjected to processing such aserror correction coding, and data obtained as a result of the errorcorrection coding is obtained. The data obtained as a result of theerror correction coding is named #2 transmission data. Data symbols areobtained by mapping #2 transmission data. The data symbols are separatedinto data symbols for stream 3 and data symbols for stream 4, so thatdata symbols (data symbol group) for stream 3 and data symbols (datasymbol group) for stream 4 are obtained. At this time, a data symbolhaving symbol number i for stream 3 is s3(i), and a data symbol havingsymbol number i for stream 4 is s4(i). Then, “modulated signal 3” t ×3(i) having symbol number i is expressed as follows, for example. [Math.5]

$\begin{matrix}{tx3(i) = e(i) \times s3(i) + f(i) \times s4(i)} & \text{­­­Expression (5)}\end{matrix}$

Then, “modulated signal 4” t × 4(i) having symbol number i is expressedas follows, for example. [Math. 6]

$\begin{matrix}{tx4(i) = g(i) \times s3(i) + h(i) \times s4(i)} & \text{­­­Expression (6)}\end{matrix}$

Note that e(i), f(i), g(i), and h(i) in Expressions (5) and (6) can bedefined by complex numbers, and thus may be real numbers.

Although e(i), f(i), g(i), and h(i) are indicated, e(i), f(i), g(i), andh(i) may not be functions of symbol number i and may be fixed values.

Then, the base station in FIGS. 1 or 3 transmits “a symbol group formodulated signal 3” which includes “signals in a data transmission areaof modulated signal 3” which are constituted by data symbols. Then, thebase station in FIGS. 1 or 3 transmits “a symbol group for modulatedsignal 4” which includes “signals in a data transmission area ofmodulated signal 4” which are constituted by data symbols.

Supplementary Note

As a matter of course, the present disclosure may be carried out bycombining a plurality of the exemplary embodiments and other contentsdescribed herein.

Moreover, each exemplary embodiment and the other contents are onlyexamples. For example, while a “modulating method, an error correctioncoding method (an error correction code, a code length, a coding rateand the like to be used), control information and the like” areexemplified, it is possible to carry out the present disclosure with thesame configuration even when other types of a “modulating method, anerror correction coding method (an error correction code, a code length,a coding rate and the like to be used), control information and thelike” are applied.

As for a modulating method, even when a modulating method other than themodulating methods described herein is used, it is possible to carry outthe exemplary embodiments and the other contents described herein. Forexample, amplitude phase shift keying (APSK), pulse amplitude modulation(PAM), phase shift keying (PSK), and quadrature amplitude modulation(QAM) may be applied, or in each modulating method, uniform mapping ornon-uniform mapping may be performed. APSK includes 16APSK, 64APSK,128APSK, 256APSK, 1024APSK, and 4096APSK, for example. PAM includes4PAM, 8PAM, 16PAM, 64PAM, 128PAM, 256PAM, 1024PAM, and 4096PAM, forexample. PSK includes BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16PSK, 64PSK, 128PSK, 256PSK,1024PSK, and 4096PSK, for example. QAM includes 4QAM, 8QAM, 16QAM,64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM, 1024QAM, and 4096QAM, for example.

A method for arranging signal points, such as 2 signal points, 4 signalpoints, 8 signal points, 16 signal points, 64 signal points, 128 signalpoints, 256 signal points, and 1024 signal points on an I-Q plane (amodulating method having 2 signal points, 4 signal points, 8 signalpoints, 16 signal points, 64 signal points, 128 signal points, 256signal points, and 1024 signal points, for instance) is not limited to asignal point arranging method according to the modulating methodsdescribed herein.

The “base station” described herein may be a broadcast station, a basestation, an access point, a terminal, or a mobile phone, for example.Then, the “terminal” described herein may be a television, a radio, aterminal, a personal computer, a mobile phone, an access point, or abase station, for instance. The “base station” and the “terminal” in thepresent disclosure may be devices having a communication function, andsuch devices may be configured to be connected with devices for runningapplications such as a television, a radio, a personal computer, and amobile phone, via a certain interface. Furthermore, in the presentembodiment, symbols other than data symbols, such as, for example, apilot symbol and a symbol for control information may be arranged in anymanner in frames.

Then, any names may be given to a pilot symbol and a symbol for controlinformation, and such symbols may be, for example, known symbolsmodulated using PSK modulation in a transmitting device or a receivingdevice. Alternatively, the receiving device may be able to learn asymbol transmitted by the transmitting device by establishingsynchronization. The receiving device performs, using the symbol,frequency synchronization, time synchronization, channel estimation ofeach modulated signal (estimation of channel state information (CSI)),and signal detection, for instance. Note that a pilot symbol may bereferred to as a preamble, a unique word, a postamble, or a referencesymbol, for instance.

Moreover, the control information symbol is a symbol for transmittinginformation that is used for realizing communication other thancommunication for data (data of an application, for instance) and thatis to be transmitted to a communicating party (for example, a modulatingmethod used for communication, an error correction coding method, acoding rate of the error correction coding method, setting informationin an upper layer, and the like).

Note that the present disclosure is not limited to each exemplaryembodiment, and can be carried out with various modifications. Forexample, the case where the present disclosure is performed as acommunication device is described in each exemplary embodiment. However,the present disclosure is not limited to this case, and thiscommunication method can also be used as software.

Note that a program for executing the above-described communicationmethod may be stored in a ROM (Read Only Memory) in advance, and a CPU(Central Processing Unit) may be caused to operate this program.

Moreover, the program for executing the above-described communicationmethod may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, the programstored in the recording medium may be recorded in a RAM (Random AccessMemory) of a computer, and the computer may be caused to operateaccording to this program.

Then, the configurations of the above-described exemplary embodiments,for instance, may be each realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration)which is typically an integrated circuit having an input terminal and anoutput terminal. The configurations may be separately formed as onechip, or all or at least one of the configurations of the exemplaryembodiments may be formed as one chip. The LSI is described here, butthe integrated circuit may also be referred to as an IC (IntegratedCircuit), a system LSI, a super LSI, or an ultra LSI, depending on adegree of integration. Moreover, a circuit integration technique is notlimited to the LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or ageneral purpose processor. After manufacturing of the LSI, aprogrammable FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) or a reconfigurableprocessor which is reconfigurable in connection or settings of circuitcells inside the LSI may be used. Further, when development of asemiconductor technology or another derived technology provides acircuit integration technology which replaces the LSI, as a matter ofcourse, functional blocks may be integrated by using this technology.Application of biotechnology, for instance, is one such possibility.

Embodiment 3

The present embodiment describes a multicast communication method whenbeamforming different from the beamforming in Embodiments 1 and 2 isapplied.

The configuration of the base station is as described with reference toFIGS. 1 to 3 in Embodiment 1, and thus a description of portions whichoperate in the same manner as those in Embodiment 1 is omitted. Also,the configuration of a terminal which communicates with a base stationis as described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6 in Embodiment 1, and thusa description of portions which operate in the same manner as those inEmbodiment 1 is omitted.

The following describes an example of operation of a base station and aterminal in the present embodiment.

FIG. 22 illustrates the case where the base station transmits atransmission stream for multicasting to one terminal.

In FIG. 22 , base station 700 transmits transmission beam 2201-1 for“stream 1-1 (a first beam for stream 1) (for multicasting)” from anantenna for transmission to terminal 2202-1, and terminal 2202-1performs directivity control to generate receiving directivity 2203-1,and receives transmission beam 2201-1 for “stream 1-1”.

FIG. 23 is for describing a “procedure for performing communicationbetween a base station and a terminal” to achieve the state ofcommunication between the base station and the terminal as illustratedin FIG. 22 .

1] First, the terminal transmits a “request to transmit stream 1 bymulticasting” to a base station.

2] Upon receiving 1], the base station becomes aware that the basestation “is not transmitting stream 1 by multicasting”. Then, the basestation transmits, to the terminal, a training symbol for transmissiondirectivity control, and a training symbol for receiving directivitycontrol, in order to transmit stream 1 by multicasting.

3] The terminal receives the training symbol for transmissiondirectivity control and the training symbol for receiving directivitycontrol transmitted by the base station, and transmits feedbackinformation to the base station in order that the base station performstransmission directivity control and the terminal performs receivingdirectivity control. 4] The base station determines a method fortransmission directivity control (determines, for instance, a weightingfactor to be used for directivity control), based on the feedbackinformation transmitted by the terminal, performs transmissiondirectivity control, and transmits data symbols for stream 1.

5] The terminal determines a receiving directivity control method(determines, for instance, a weighting factor to be used for directivitycontrol), and starts receiving the data symbols for stream 1 transmittedby the base station.

Note that the “procedure for a base station and a terminal tocommunicate” in FIG. 23 is an example, and the order of transmittinginformation items is not limited to the order in FIG. 23 , andcommunication between the base station and the terminal can be similarlyestablished even if the order of transmitting information items haschanged. FIG. 23 illustrates, as an example, the case in which theterminal performs receiving directivity control, yet the terminal maynot perform receiving directivity control. In such a case, the basestation may not transmit a training symbol for receiving directivitycontrol and the terminal does not determine a receiving directivitycontrol method, in FIG. 23 .

When the base station performs transmission directivity control, if thebase station has a configuration in FIG. 1 , for example, multiplicationcoefficients for multipliers 204-1, 204-2, 204-3, and 204-4 in FIG. 2are determined, whereas if the base station has a configuration in FIG.3 , weighting factors for weighting synthesizer 301 are determined, forexample. Note that the number of streams to be transmitted is “1” inFIG. 22 , yet the present disclosure is not limited to this.

When the terminal performs receiving directivity control, if theterminal has a configuration in FIG. 4 , for example, multiplicationcoefficients for multipliers 503-1, 503-2, 503-3, and 503-4 in FIG. 5are determined, whereas when the terminal has the configuration in FIG.6 , multiplication coefficients for multipliers 603-1, 603-2, ..., and603-L, for example, are determined.

FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating examples of symbols which the basestation transmits and symbols which a terminal transmits along atime-axis, when the base station in FIG. 23 transmits a symbol fortransmission directivity control, a symbol for receiving directivitycontrol, and data symbols. In FIG. 24 , (a) is a diagram illustratingexamples of symbols which the base station transmits, along thetime-axis, and (b) is a diagram illustrating examples of symbols whichthe terminal transmits along the time-axis, while the horizontal axisindicates time in both of (a) and (b).

When the base station and the terminal communicate with each other asillustrated in FIG. 23 , first, the base station transmits “base stationtransmission directivity control training symbol” 2401 as illustrated inFIG. 24 . For example, “base station transmission directivity controltraining symbol” 2401 includes a control information symbol and a knownPSK symbol.

Then, the terminal receives “base station transmission directivitycontrol training symbol” 2401 transmitted by the base station, andtransmits, as feedback information symbol 2402, information on anantenna to be used by the base station for transmission and informationon multiplication coefficients (or weighting factors) to be used fordirectivity control, for example.

The base station receives “feedback information symbol” 2402 transmittedby the terminal, determines an antenna to be used for transmission fromfeedback information symbol 2402, and determines a coefficient to beused for transmission directivity control from feedback informationsymbol 2402. After that, the base station transmits “terminal receivingdirectivity control training symbol” 2403. For example, “terminalreceiving directivity control training symbol” 2403 includes a controlinformation symbol and a known PSK symbol.

Then, the terminal receives “terminal receiving directivity controltraining symbol” 2403 transmitted by the base station, and determines anantenna which the terminal is to use for receiving and a multiplicationcoefficient which the terminal is to use for receiving directivitycontrol, for example. Then, the terminal transmits feedback informationsymbol 2404, notifying that preparation for receiving data symbols iscompleted.

Then, the base station receives “feedback information symbol” 2404transmitted by the terminal, and outputs data symbols 2405 based onfeedback information symbol 2404.

Note that communication between the base station and the terminal inFIG. 24 is an example, and the order of transmitting symbols and theorder in which the base station and the terminal transmit symbols arenot limited to those illustrated therein. “Base station transmissiondirectivity control training symbol” 2401, “feedback information symbol”2402, “terminal receiving directivity control training symbol” 2403,“feedback information symbol” 2404, and “data symbols” 2405 may eachinclude: a preamble for signal detection, time synchronization,frequency synchronization, frequency offset estimation, and channelestimation, a reference symbol, a pilot symbol, and a symbol fortransmitting control information, for instance.

FIG. 25 illustrates examples of symbols which the base station transmitswhen the base station transmits data symbols for stream 1 aftercommunication between the base station and the terminal in FIG. 23 iscompleted, while the horizontal axis indicates time.

In FIG. 25 , the base station transmits a first data symbol fortransmission beam 1 for stream 1 as “stream 1-1 data symbol (1) (formulticasting)” 2501-1-1. After that, interval 2502-1 in which datasymbols can be transmitted is arranged.

After that, the base station transmits a second data symbol fortransmission beam 1 for stream 1 (for multicasting) as “stream 1-1 datasymbol (2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-2. After that, interval 2502-2 inwhich data symbols can be transmitted is arranged.

After that, the base station transmits a third data symbol fortransmission beam 1 for stream 1 (for multicasting) as “stream1-1 datasymbol (3) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-3.

Accordingly, the base station transmits data symbols for “stream (formulticasting) 1-1” 2201-1 illustrated in FIG. 22 . Note that in FIG. 25, “stream 1-1 data symbol (1) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-1, “stream 1-1data symbol (2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-2, “data symbol 1-1 datasymbol (3) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-3, and so on may each include,other than a data symbol, a preamble for signal detection, timesynchronization, frequency synchronization, frequency offset estimation,and channel estimation, a reference symbol, a pilot symbol, and a symbolfor transmitting control information, for instance.

Note that in FIG. 25 , interval 2502-1 in which data symbols can betransmitted includes unicast transmitting interval 2503-1, and interval2502-2 in which data symbols can be transmitted includes unicasttransmitting interval 2503-2.

In FIG. 25 , a frame includes unicast transmitting intervals 2503-1 and2503-2. For example, in FIG. 25 , the base station may transmit symbolsfor multicasting in an interval within interval 2502-1 in which datasymbols can be transmitted and other than unicast transmitting interval2503-1, and an interval within interval 2502-2 in which data symbols canbe transmitted and other than unicast transmitting interval 2503-2. Thispoint will be described later using an example.

Thus, including a unicast transmitting interval in a frame is a usefulfeature for stably operating a wireless communication system. This pointwill be later described using an example. Note that the unicasttransmitting intervals may not be in the temporal positions asillustrated in FIG. 25 , and may be arranged in any temporal positions.Note that in the unicast transmitting intervals, the base station maytransmit symbols or the terminal may transmit symbols.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the base stationcan directly set a unicast transmitting interval, or as another method,the base station may set the maximum transmission-data transmissionspeed for transmitting symbols for multicasting.

For example, when the transmission speed at which the base station cantransmit data is 2 Gbps (bps: bits per second) and the maximumtransmission speed at which the base station can transmit data that canbe assigned to transmit symbols for multicasting is 1.5 Gbps, a unicasttransmitting interval corresponding to 500 Mbps can be set.

Accordingly, a configuration may be adopted in which the base stationcan indirectly set a unicast transmitting interval. Note that anotherspecific example will be described later.

Note that in accordance with the state in FIG. 22 , FIG. 25 illustratesa frame configuration in which “stream 1-1 data symbol (1) (formulticasting)” 2501-1-1, “stream 1-1 data symbol (2) (for multicasting)”2501-1-2, and “stream 1-1 data symbol (3) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-3are present, yet the present disclosure is not limited to such a frameconfiguration. For example, a data symbol for a stream for multicastingother than stream 1 (stream 1-1) may be present, a data symbol forstream 1-2 which is a second transmission beam for stream 1, and a datasymbol for stream 1-3 which is a third transmission beam for stream 1may be present. This point will be described later.

FIG. 26 illustrates a state when a terminal is newly added to the statein FIG. 22 in which the base station transmits transmission streams formulticasting to one terminal, and elements which operate in the samemanner as those in FIG. 22 are assigned the same reference numerals.

In FIG. 26 , the terminal newly added is 2202-2. Terminal 2202-2generates receiving directivity 2203-2 by performing directivitycontrol, and receives transmission beam 2201-1 for “stream 1-1 (formulticasting)” .

The following describes FIG. 26 .

In the following description, in FIG. 26 , terminal 2202-2 newlyparticipates in the multicast communication in a state where basestation 700 and terminal 2202-1 are performing multicast communication.Thus, as illustrated in FIG. 27 , the base station transmits “terminalreceiving directivity control training symbol” 2701 and “data symbol”2702, and does not transmit “base station transmission training symbol”illustrated in FIG. 24 . Note that in FIG. 27 , the horizontal axisindicates time.

FIG. 28 illustrates an example of operation performed to achieve a statein which the base station transmits transmission beams for multicastingto two terminals as illustrated in FIG. 26 .

1] Terminal 2202-2 transmits a “request to transmit stream 1 bymulticasting” to the base station. Note that the “request to transmitstream 1 by multicasting” is transmitted in a unicast transmittinginterval in FIG. 25 .

2] Upon receiving 1], the base station notifies terminal 2202-2 that“the base station is transmitting stream 1 for multicasting”. Note thatthe base station transmits a notification indicating that “the basestation is transmitting stream 1 for multicasting” in a unicasttransmitting interval in FIG. 25 .

3] Upon receiving 2], terminal 2202-2 performs receiving directivitycontrol, in order to start receiving stream 1 for multicasting. Then,terminal 2202-2 performs receiving directivity control, and notifies thebase station that “terminal 2202-2 has successfully received stream 1for multicasting”.

4] Upon receiving 3], the base station becomes aware that the terminalhas successfully received “stream 1 for multicasting”.

5] Terminal 2202-2 performs receiving directivity control, and startsreceiving “stream 1 for multicasting”.

FIG. 29 illustrates that a terminal is newly added to a state in FIG. 22in which the base station is transmitting a transmission stream formulticasting to one terminal. Elements which operate in the same manneras those in FIG. 22 are assigned the same reference numerals.

In FIG. 29 , the terminal newly added is 2202-2. At this time, differentpoints from FIG. 26 are that base station 700 newly transmitstransmission beam 2201-2 for “stream 1-2 (second transmission beam forstream 1) (for multicasting)”, and terminal 2202-2 performs directivitycontrol to generate receiving directivity 2203-2, and receivestransmission beam 2201-2 for “stream 1-2 (for multicasting)”.

The following describes control for achieving the state as in FIG. 29 .

In the following description, in FIG. 29 , terminal 2202-2 newlyparticipates in multicast communication in a state in which base station700 and terminal 2202-1 are performing multicast communication.

FIG. 30 illustrates an example of operation performed in order toachieve a state in which the base station transmits transmission beamsfor multicasting to two terminals, as illustrated in FIG. 29 .

1] Terminal 2202-2 transmits a “request to transmit stream 1 bymulticasting” to the base station. Note that the “request to transmitstream 1 by multicasting” is transmitted in a unicast transmittinginterval in FIG. 25 .

2] Upon receiving 1], the base station notifies terminal 2202-2 that“the base station is transmitting stream 1 for multicasting”. Note thatthe base station transmits a notification indicating that “the basestation is transmitting stream 1 for multicasting” in a unicasttransmitting interval in FIG. 25 .

3] Upon receiving 2], terminal 2202-2 notifies the base station that“terminal 2202-2 has not received stream 1 for multicasting”. Note thatterminal 2202-2 transmits the notification indicating that “stream 1 formulticasting is not received” in a unicast transmitting interval in FIG.25 .

4] Upon receiving 3], the base station determines to transmit anothertransmission beam (specifically, transmission beam 2201-2 in FIG. 29 )for stream 1 for multicasting. Note that here, the base stationdetermines to transmit another transmission beam for stream 1 formulticasting, yet the base station may determine not to transmit anothertransmission beam for stream 1 for multicasting. This point will belater described.

Thus, the base station transmits a training symbol for transmissiondirectivity control and a training symbol for receiving directivitycontrol to terminal 2202-2, in order to transmit stream 1 bymulticasting. Note that the base station transmits a transmission beamfor stream 1-1 in FIG. 29 , separately from transmission of thesesymbols. This point will be described later.

5] Terminal 2202-2 receives a training symbol for transmissiondirectivity control and a training symbol for receiving directivitycontrol which the base station has transmitted, and transmits feedbackinformation to the base station in order that the base station performstransmission directivity control and terminal 2202-2 performs receivingdirectivity control.

6] Based on the feedback information transmitted by terminal 2202-2, thebase station determines a method for transmission directivity control(determines, for instance, a weighting factor to be used when performingdirectivity control), and transmits a data symbol for stream 1(transmission beam 2201-2 for stream 1-2 in FIG. 29 ).

7] Terminal 2202-2 determines a receiving directivity control method(determines, for instance, a weighting factor to be used when performingdirectivity control), and starts receiving data symbols for stream 1(transmission beam 2201-2 for stream 1-2 in FIG. 29 ) which the basestation has transmitted.

Note that the “procedure for a base station and a terminal tocommunicate” in FIG. 30 is an example, and the order of transmittinginformation items is not limited to the order in FIG. 30 . Thus,communication between the base station and the terminal can be similarlyestablished even if the order of transmitting information items haschanged.

FIG. 30 illustrates an example in which the terminal performs receivingdirectivity control, yet the terminal may not perform receivingdirectivity control. In such a case, the base station may not transmit atraining symbol for receiving directivity control, and the terminal maynot determine a receiving directivity control method, in FIG. 30 .

When the base station performs transmission directivity control, if thebase station has a configuration in FIG. 1 , for example, multiplicationcoefficients for multipliers 204-1, 204-2, 204-3, and 204-4 in FIG. 2are determined, whereas if the base station has a configuration in FIG.3 , weighting factors for weighting synthesizer 301 are determined, forexample. Note that the number of streams to be transmitted is “2” in thecase of FIG. 29 , yet the present disclosure is not limited to this.

Then, when terminals 2202-1 and 2202-2 perform receiving directivitycontrol, if the terminals have a configuration in FIG. 4 , for example,multiplication coefficients for multiplier 503-1, 503-2, 503-3, and503-4 in FIG. 5 are determined, whereas when the terminals have aconfiguration in FIG. 6 , multiplication coefficients for multipliers603-1, 603-2, ..., and 603-L are determined, for example.

FIG. 31 illustrates examples of symbols transmitted by the base stationwhen the base station transmits data symbols for stream 1 aftercommunication between the base station and the terminal in FIG. 30 iscompleted, while the horizontal axis indicates time.

In FIG. 31 , “stream 1-1” in FIG. 29 is present, and thus similarly toFIG. 25 , “stream 1-1 data symbol (M) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-M,“stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+1), and“stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+2) arepresent. Note that “(M), (M+1), (M+2)” are illustrated, and this isbecause stream 1-1 (for multicasting) is already present before stream1-2 (for multicasting) is present. Accordingly, in FIG. 31 , M isassumed to be an integer of 2 or greater.

Then, as illustrated in FIG. 31 , “stream 1-2 data symbol (1) (formulticasting)” 3101-1, “stream 1-2 data symbol (2) (for multicasting)”3101-2, and “stream 1-2 data symbol (3) (for multicasting)” 3101-3 arepresent in intervals other than unicast transmitting intervals 2503-1and 2503-2.

The features are as follows as described above.

-   “Stream 1-1 data symbol (M) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-M, “stream    1-1 data symbol (M+1) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+1), “stream 1-1    data symbol (M+2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+2), “stream 1-2 data    symbol (1) (for multicasting)” 3101-1, “stream 1-2 data symbol (2)    (for multicasting)” 3101-2, and “stream 1-2 data symbol (3) (for    multicasting)” 3101-3 are all data symbols for transmitting “stream    1”.-   The terminal can obtain “data of stream 1” by obtaining “data    symbols for stream 1-1”. The terminal can obtain “data of stream 1”    by obtaining “data symbols for stream 1-2”.-   The directivities of transmission beams for “stream 1-1 data    symbol (M) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-M, “stream 1-1 data symbol    (M+1) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+1), and “stream 1-1 data symbol    (M+2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+2) are different from the    directivities of transmission beams for “stream 1-2 data symbol (1)    (for multicasting)” 3101-1, “stream 1-2 data symbol (2) (for    multicasting)” 3101-2, and “stream 1-2 data symbol (3) (for    multicasting)” 3101-3. Thus, a set of multiplication coefficients    (or weighting factors) for the transmitting device of the base    station used in order to generate transmission beams for “stream 1-1    data symbol (M) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-M, “stream 1-1 data    symbol (M+1) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+1), and “stream 1-1 data    symbol (M+2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+2) are different from a    set of multiplication coefficients (or weighting factors) for the    transmitting device of the base station used in order to generate    transmission beams for “stream 1-2 data symbol (1) (for    multicasting)” 3101-1, “stream 1-2 data symbol (2) (for    multicasting)” 3101-2, and “stream 1-2 data symbol (3) (for    multicasting)” 3101-3.

The above allows two terminals to receive multicast streams which thebase station has transmitted. At this time, directivity control isperformed by the transmitting device and the receiving device, and thusan advantageous effect of increasing an area in which streams formulticasting can be received is yielded. Furthermore, streams andtransmission beams are added only when necessary, and thus anadvantageous effect of effectively utilizing frequency, time, and spaceresources for transmitting data.

Note that control as described below may be performed. The details ofthe control are as follows.

FIG. 32 illustrates “examples of symbols which the base stationtransmits when the base station transmits data symbols (for stream 1)after communication between the base station and the terminal in FIG. 30is completed”, which are different from FIG. 31 , where the horizontalaxis indicates time. Note that elements which operate in the same manneras in FIGS. 25 and 31 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG.32 .

Different points in FIG. 32 from FIG. 31 are that unicast transmittingintervals 2503-1 and 2503-2 are set to longer time periods, and thus thebase station does not further add and transmit symbols for multicasting.

FIG. 33 illustrates an example of operation when new terminal 2202-3transmits a request to the base station to add a transmission beam, inaddition to transmission beams for multicasting transmitted by the basestation to two terminals (terminals 2202-1 and 2202-2), as illustratedin FIG. 29 . Note that FIG. 32 illustrates a frame of a modulated signalwhich the base station transmits.

1] Terminal 2202-3 transmits to the base station a “request to transmitstream 1 by multicasting”. Note that terminal 2202-3 transmits the“request to transmit stream 1 by multicasting” in a unicast transmittinginterval in FIG. 32 .

2] Upon receiving 1], the base station notifies terminal 2202-3 that“the base station is transmitting stream 1 for multicasting”. Note thatthe base station transmits the “notification indicating that the basestation is transmitting stream 1 for multicasting” in a unicasttransmitting interval in FIG. 32 .

3] Upon receiving 2], terminal 2202-3 notifies the base station that“terminal 2202-3 has not received stream 1 for multicasting”. Note thatterminal 2202-3 transmits the “notification indicating that stream 1 formulticasting has not been received” in a unicast transmitting intervalin FIG. 32 .

4] Upon receiving 3], the base station determines whether a transmissionbeam other than the transmission beam for stream 1-1 and thetransmission beam for stream 1-2 can be transmitted as a transmissionbeam for stream 1 for multicasting. At this time, taking intoconsideration that the frame is as illustrated in FIG. 32 , the basestation determines not to transmit another transmission beam for stream1 for multicasting. Accordingly, the base station notifies terminal2202-3 that “the base station is not to transmit another transmissionbeam for stream 1 for multicasting”. Note that the base stationtransmits the “notification indicating that the base station is not totransmit another transmission beam for stream 1 for multicasting” in aunicast transmitting interval in FIG. 32 .

5] Terminal 2202-3 receives the “notification indicating that the basestation is not to transmit another transmission beam for stream 1 formulticasting”.

Note that the “procedure for a base station and a terminal tocommunicate” in FIG. 33 is an example, and the order of transmittinginformation items is not limited to the order in FIG. 33 , so thatcommunication between the base station and the terminal can be similarlyestablished even if the order of transmitting items has changed. In thismanner, if there are insufficient communication resources for multicasttransmission, a multicast transmission beam may not be added.

FIG. 34 illustrates an example of operation when new terminal 2202-3transmits a request to the base station to add a transmission beam foranother stream for multicasting (stream 2), in addition to transmissionbeams for multicasting transmitted by the base station to two terminals(terminals 2202-1 and 2202-2), illustrated in FIG. 29 . Note that aframe of a modulated signal transmitted by the base station is in thestate as illustrated in FIG. 31 .

1] Terminal 2202-3 transmits to the base station a “request to transmitstream 2 by multicasting”. Note that terminal 2202-3 transmits the“request to transmit stream 2 by multicasting” in unicast transmittinginterval 2503 in FIG. 31 .

2] Upon receiving 1], the base station notifies terminal 2202-3 that“the base station is not transmitting stream 2 for multicasting”. Inaddition, the base station determines “whether the base station can addand transmit a transmission beam for stream 2 for multicasting”. At thistime, taking into consideration that the frame is in the state asillustrated in FIG. 31 , the base station notifies terminal 2202-3 that“the base station is able to transmit a transmission beam for stream 2for multicasting”. Note that the base station transmits the“notification indicating that the base station is not transmittingstream 2 for multicasting” and the “notification indicating that thebase station is able to transmit a transmission beam for stream 2 formulticasting” in unicast transmitting interval 2503 in FIG. 31 .

3] Upon receiving 2], terminal 2202-3 notifies the base station that“terminal 2203-3 is ready to receive stream 2 for multicasting”. Notethat terminal 2202-3 transmits the notification indicating that“terminal 2202-3 is ready to receive stream 2 for multicasting” inunicast transmitting interval 2503 in FIG. 31 .

4] Upon receiving 3], the base station determines to transmit atransmission beam for stream 2 for multicasting. Then, the base stationtransmits a training symbol for transmission directivity control and atraining symbol for receiving directivity control, in order to transmitstream 2 to terminal 2202-3 by multicasting. Note that the base stationtransmits transmission beams for streams 1-1 and 1-2, as illustrated inFIG. 31 , separately from transmission of the above symbols. This pointwill be described later.

5] Terminal 2202-3 receives the training symbol for transmissiondirectivity control and the training symbol for receiving directivitycontrol which the base station has transmitted, and transmits feedbackinformation to the base station in order that the base station performstransmission directivity control and terminal 2202-3 performs receivingdirectivity control.

6] Based on the feedback information transmitted by terminal 2202-3, thebase station determines a method for transmission directivity control(determines a weighting factor used for directivity control, forinstance), and transmits data symbols for stream 2.

7] Terminal 2202-3 determines a receiving directivity control method(determines a weighting factor used for directivity control, forinstance), and starts receiving the data symbols for stream 2 which thebase station has transmitted.

Note that the “procedure for a base station and a terminal tocommunicate” in FIG. 34 is an example, and the order of transmittinginformation items is not limited to the order in FIG. 34 , andcommunication between the base station and the terminal can be similarlyestablished even if the order of transmitting information items haschanged. FIG. 34 illustrates an example in which the terminal performsreceiving directivity control, yet the terminal may not performreceiving directivity control. In such a case, the base station may nottransmit a training symbol for receiving directivity control, and theterminal does not determine a receiving directivity control method, inFIG. 34 .

When the base station performs transmission directivity control, forexample, multiplication coefficients for multipliers 204-1, 204-2,204-3, and 204-4 in FIG. 2 are determined if the base station has aconfiguration in FIG. 1 .

Then, when terminals 2202-1, 2202-2, and 2202-3 perform receivingdirectivity control, if the terminals have a configuration in FIG. 4 ,multiplication coefficients for multipliers 503-1, 503-2, 503-3, and503-4 in FIG. 5 are determined, for example, whereas if the terminalshave a configuration in FIG. 6 , multiplication coefficients formultipliers 603-1, 603-2, ..., and 603-L are determined, for example.

FIG. 35 illustrates examples of symbols which the base station transmitswhen the base station transmits data symbols for stream 1 and stream 2after communication between the base station and a terminal in FIG. 34is completed, where the horizontal axis indicates time.

In FIG. 35 , “stream 1-1” and “stream 1-2” illustrated in FIG. 31 arepresent, and thus “stream 1-1 data symbol (M) (for multicasting)”2501-1-M, “stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) (for multicasting)”2501-1-(M+1), and “stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) (for multicasting)”2501-1-(M+2) are present. In addition, “stream 1-2 data symbol (N) (formulticasting)” 3101-N, “stream 1-2 data symbol (N+1) (for multicasting)”3101-(N+1), and “stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2) (for multicasting)”3101-(N+2) are present. Note that N and M are integers of 2 or greater.

As illustrated in FIG. 35 , in intervals other than unicast transmittingintervals 2503-1 and 2503-2, “stream 2-1 data symbol (1) (formulticasting)” 3501-1, “stream 2-1 data symbol (2) (for multicasting)”3501-2, and “stream 2-1 data symbol (3) (for multicasting)” 3501-3 arepresent.

As described above, the features achieved at this time are as follows.

-   “Stream 1-1 data symbol (M) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-M, “stream    1-1 data symbol (M+1) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+1), “stream 1-1    data symbol (M+2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+2), “stream 1-2 data    symbol (N) (for multicasting)” 3101-N, “stream 1-2 data symbol (N+1)    (for multicasting)” 3101-(N+1), and “stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2)    (for multicasting)” 3101-(N+2) are all data symbols for transmitting    “stream 1”.-   A terminal obtains “data of stream 1” by obtaining “data symbols for    stream 1-1”. Further, the terminal obtains “data of stream 1” by    obtaining “data symbols for stream 1-2”.-   The directivities of transmission beams for “stream 1-1 data    symbol (M) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-M, “stream 1-1 data symbol    (M+1) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+1), and “stream 1-1 data symbol    (M+2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+2) are different from the    directivities of transmission beams for “stream 1-2 data symbol (1)    (for multicasting)” 3101-1, “stream 1-2 data symbol (2) (for    multicasting)” 3101-2, and “stream 1-2 data symbol (3) (for    multicasting)” 3101-3.

Thus, a set of multiplication coefficients (or weighting factors) forthe transmitting device of the base station used in order to generatetransmission beams for “stream 1-1 data symbol (M) (for multicasting)”2501-1-M, “stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) (for multicasting)”2501-1-(M+1), and “stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) (for multicasting)”2501-1-(M+2) is different from a set of multiplication coefficients (orweighting factors) for the transmitting device of the base station usedin order to generate transmission beams for “stream 1-2 data symbol (1)(for multicasting)” 3101-1, “stream 1-2 data symbol (2) (formulticasting)” 3101-2, and “stream 1-2 data symbol (3) (formulticasting)” 3101-3.

-   “Stream 2-1 data symbol (1) (for multicasting)” 3501-1, “stream 2-1    data symbol (2) (for multicasting)” 3501-2, and “stream 2-1 data    symbol (3) (for multicasting)” 3501-3 are data symbols for    transmitting “stream 2”.-   A terminal obtains data of “stream 2” by obtaining “data symbols for    stream 2-1”. The above allows the terminal to receive a plurality of    multicast streams (streams 1 and 2) transmitted by the base station.    At this time, directivity control is performed by the transmitting    device and the receiving device, and thus an advantageous effect of    increasing an area in which streams for multicasting can be received    is yielded. Furthermore, streams and transmission beams are added    only when necessary, and thus an advantageous effect of effectively    utilizing frequency, time, and space resources for transmitting    data.

Note that control as described below may be performed. The details ofthe control are as follows.

FIG. 32 illustrates “examples of symbols which the base stationtransmits when the base station transmits data symbols (for stream 1)”,which is different from FIG. 35 , where the horizontal axis indicatestime. Note that elements which operate in the same manner as those inFIGS. 25 and 31 are assigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 32 .

Different points in FIG. 32 from FIG. 35 are that unicast transmittingintervals 2503-1 and 2503-2 are set to longer time periods, and thus thebase station does not add and transmit any more symbols formulticasting, that is, for example, symbols for a new stream.

FIG. 36 illustrates an example of operation when new terminal 2202-3transmits a request to the base station to add a transmission beam foranother stream for multicasting (stream 2), in addition to transmissionbeams for multicasting transmitted by the base station to two terminals(terminals 2202-1 and 2202-2), as illustrated in FIG. 29 . Note thatFIG. 32 illustrates a frame of a modulated signal which the base stationtransmits.

1] Terminal 2202-3 transmits to the base station a “request to transmitstream 2 by multicasting”. Note that terminal 2202-3 transmits the“request to transmit stream 2 by multicasting” in a unicast transmittinginterval in FIG. 32 .

2] Upon receiving 1], the base station notifies terminal 2202-3 that“the base station is not transmitting stream 2 for multicasting”. Notethat the base station transmits the notification indicating that “thebase station is not transmitting stream 2 for multicasting” in a unicasttransmitting interval in FIG. 32 . In addition, the base stationdetermines whether a transmission beam for stream 2 for multicasting canbe transmitted. Taking the frame illustrated in FIG. 32 intoconsideration, the base station determines not to transmit atransmission beam for stream 2 for multicasting. Thus, the base stationnotifies terminal 2202-3 that “the base station is not to transmitstream 2 for multicasting”. Note that the base station transmits the“notification indicating that the base station is not to transmit stream2 for multicasting” in a unicast transmitting interval in FIG. 32 .

3] Terminal 2202-3 receives the “notification indicating that the basestation is not to transmit stream 2 for multicasting”.

Note that the “procedure for a base station and a terminal tocommunicate” in FIG. 36 is an example, and the order of transmittinginformation items is not limited to the order in FIG. 36 . Communicationbetween the base station and the terminal can be similarly establishedeven if the procedure of transmitting items has changed. In this manner,if there are insufficient communication resources for multicasttransmission, a stream and a multicast transmission beam may not beadded.

Note that a supplemental description of a method for setting unicasttransmitting intervals 2503-1 and 2503-2 illustrated in, for instance,FIG. 35 is now given.

For example, in FIG. 35 , the maximum value of the number oftransmission beams for multicasting is determined in advance or is set.

In response to requests from the terminals, the base station transmitstransmission beams for multicasting, the number of which is smaller thanor equal to the maximum value. For example, in the case of FIG. 35 , thenumber of transmission beams for multicasting is 3. Then, the basestation transmits a plurality of transmission beams for multicasting,and temporal idle time after transmitting the transmission beams is setas a unicast transmitting interval.

The unicast transmitting intervals may be determined as described above.

Supplementary Note 1

Supplementary Note 1 describes the case where a base station performsunicast communication with a plurality of terminals, or in other words,communicates separately with a plurality of terminals.

At this time, for example, #1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1, #2 symbolgroup 901-2 for stream 1, and #3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1 in FIG.9 may be control information for broadcast channels, that is, controlinformation which the base station transmits to a plurality of terminalsby broadcasting in order to perform data communication with theplurality of terminals. Note that control information is to be used to,for example, establish data communication between the base station and aterminal.

For example, #1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1, #2 symbol group 901-2for stream 1, and #3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1 in FIG. 9 may becommon search spaces. Note that a common search space is controlinformation for cell control. Also, a common search space is controlinformation broadcast to a plurality of terminals.

Similarly, for example, #1 symbol group 902-1 for stream 2, #2 symbolgroup 902-2 for stream 2, and #3 symbol group 902-3 for stream 2 in FIG.9 may be control information for broadcast channels, that is, controlinformation which the base station transmits to a plurality of terminalsby broadcasting in order to perform data communication with theplurality of terminals.

For example, #1 symbol group 902-1 for stream 2, #2 symbol group 902-2for stream 2, and #3 symbol group 902-3 for stream 2 in FIG. 9 may becommon search spaces.

Note that features of #1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1, #2 symbolgroup 901-2 for stream 1, #3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1, #1 symbolgroup 902-1 for stream 2, #2 symbol group 902-2 for stream 2, and #3symbol group 902-3 for stream 2 in FIG. 9 are as described in the aboveembodiments.

For example, #1 symbol group 1401-1 for modulated signal 1, #2 symbolgroup 1401-2 for modulated signal 1, and #3 symbol group 1401-3 formodulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 may be control information for broadcastchannels, that is, control information which the base station transmitsto a plurality of terminals by broadcasting in order to perform datacommunication with the plurality of terminals.

In addition, for example, #1 symbol group 1401-1 for modulated signal 1,#2 symbol group 1401-2 for modulated signal 1, and #3 symbol group1401-3 for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 may be common search spaces.

For example, #1 symbol group 1402-1 for modulated signal 2, #2 symbolgroup 1402-2 for modulated signal 2, and #3 symbol group 1402-3 formodulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 may be control information for broadcastchannels, that is, control information which the base station transmitsto a plurality of terminals by broadcasting in order to perform datacommunication with the plurality of terminals.

For example, #1 symbol group 1402-1 for modulated signal 2, #2 symbolgroup 1402-2 for modulated signal 2, and #3 symbol group 1402-3 formodulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 may be common search spaces.

Note that #1 symbol group 1401-1 for modulated signal 1, #2 symbol group1401-2 for modulated signal 1, and #3 symbol group 1401-3 for modulatedsignal 1 in FIG. 14 are as described in the above embodiments, and #1symbol group 1402-1 for modulated signal 2, #2 symbol group 1402-2 formodulated signal 2, and #3 symbol group 1402-3 for modulated signal 2 inFIG. 14 are as described in the above embodiments.

For example, stream 1-1 data symbol (1) 2501-1-1, stream 1-1 data symbol(2) 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1 data symbol (3) 2501-1-3 in FIG. 25 may becontrol information for broadcast channels, that is, control informationwhich the base station transmits to a plurality of terminals bybroadcasting in order to perform data communication with the pluralityof terminals.

Stream 1-1 data symbol (1) 2501-1-1, stream 1-1 data symbol (2)2501-1-2, and stream 1-1 data symbol (3) 2501-1-3 in FIG. 25 may becommon search spaces.

Note that stream 1-1 data symbol (1) 2501-1-1, stream 1-1 data symbol(2) 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1 data symbol (3) 2501-1-3 in FIG. 25 are asdescribed in the above embodiments.

For example, stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol(M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2), stream1-2 data symbol (1) 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) 3101-2, andstream 1-2 data symbol (3) 3101-3 in FIGS. 31 and 32 may be controlinformation for broadcast channels, that is, control information whichthe base station transmits to a plurality of terminals by broadcastingin order to perform data communication with the plurality of terminals.

Further, stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol(M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2), stream1-2 data symbol (1) 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) 3101-2, andstream 1-2 data symbol (3) 3101-3 in FIGS. 31 and 32 may be commonsearch spaces.

Note that stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol(M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2), stream1-2 data symbol (1) 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) 3101-2, andstream 1-2 data symbol (3) 3101-3 in FIGS. 31 and 32 are as described inthe above embodiments.

For example, in FIG. 35 , stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream1-1 data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2)2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 data symbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol(N+1) 3101-(N+1), and stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2) may becontrol information for broadcast channels, that is, control informationwhich the base station transmits to a plurality of terminals bybroadcasting in order to perform data communication with the pluralityof terminals.

Further, in FIG. 35 , stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2)2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 data symbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol(N+1) 3101-(N+1), and stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2) may becommon search spaces.

For example, stream 2-1 data symbol (1) 3501-1, stream 2-1 data symbol(2) 3501-2, and stream 2-1 data symbol (3) 3501-3 in FIG. 35 may becontrol information for broadcast channels, that is, control informationwhich the base station transmits to a plurality of terminals bybroadcasting in order to perform data communication with the pluralityof terminals.

Further, stream 2-1 data symbol (1) 3501-1, stream 2-1 data symbol (2)3501-2, and stream 2-1 data symbol (3) 3501-3 in FIG. 35 may be commonsearch spaces.

Note that in FIG. 35 , stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2)2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 data symbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol(N+1) 3101-(N+1), and stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2) are asdescribed in the above embodiments, and stream 2-1 data symbol (1)3501-1, stream 2-1 data symbol (2) 3501-2, and stream 2-1 data symbol(3) 3501-3 in FIG. 35 are as described in the above embodiments.

In FIGS. 9, 14, 25, 31, 32, and 35 , when data symbols are transmitted,a single carrier transmission method may be used, or a multi-carriertransmission method such as OFDM may be used. In addition, temporalpositions of data symbols are not limited to the positions in FIGS. 9,14, 25, 31, 32, and 35 .

Although a description is given with reference to FIGS. 25, 31, 32, and35 , assuming that the horizontal axis indicates time, similar datatransmission can be carried out even if the horizontal axis indicatesfrequency (carrier). Note that when the horizontal axis indicatesfrequency (carrier), the base station transmits data symbols using oneor more carriers or subcarriers.

Supplementary Note 2

Supplementary Note 2 describes the case where the base station performsunicast communication with a plurality of terminals, or in other words,communicates separately with a plurality of terminals.

At this time, for example, #1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1, #2 symbolgroup 901-2 for stream 1, #3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1, #1 symbolgroup 902-1 for stream 2, #2 symbol group 902-2 for stream 2, and #3symbol group 902-3 for stream 2 in FIG. 9 may be data addressed to thebase station or data addressed to a terminal among a plurality ofterminals communicating with the base station. At this time, such datamay include control information.

Note that #1 symbol group 901-1 for stream 1, #2 symbol group 901-2 forstream 1, #3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1, #1 symbol group 902-1 forstream 2, #2 symbol group 902-2 for stream 2, and #3 symbol group 902-3for stream 2 in FIG. 9 are as described in the above embodiments.

For example, #1 symbol group 1401-1 for modulated signal 1, #2 symbolgroup 1401-2 for modulated signal 1, #3 symbol group 1401-3 formodulated signal 1, #1 symbol group 1401-3 for modulated signal 2, and#2 symbol group 1402-2 for modulated signal 2, and #3 symbol group1402-3 for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 may be data addressed to thebase station or data addressed to a terminal among a plurality ofterminals communicating with the base station. At this time, such datamay include control information.

Note that #1 symbol group 1401-1 for modulated signal 1, #2 symbol group1401-2 for modulated signal 1, #3 symbol group 1401-3 for modulatedsignal 1, #1 symbol group 1401-3 for modulated signal 2, and #2 symbolgroup 1402-2 for modulated signal 2, and #3 symbol group 1402-3 formodulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 are as described in the above embodiments.

For example, stream 1-1 data symbol (1) 2501-1-1, stream 1-1 data symbol(2) 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1 data symbol (3) 2501-1-3 in FIG. 25 may bedata addressed to the base station or data addressed to a terminal amonga plurality of terminals communicating with the base station. At thistime, such data may include control information.

Note that stream 1-1 data symbol (1) 2501-1-1, stream 1-1 data symbol(2) 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1 data symbol (3) 2501-1-3 in FIG. 25 are asdescribed in the above embodiments.

For example, stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol(M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2), stream1-2 data symbol (1) 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) 3101-2, andstream 1-2 data symbol (3) 3101-3 in FIGS. 31 and 32 may be dataaddressed to the base station or data addressed to a terminal among aplurality of terminals communicating with the base station. At thistime, such data may include control information.

Note that stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol(M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2), stream1-2 data symbol (1) 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) 3101-2, andstream 1-2 data symbol (3) 3101-3 in FIGS. 31 and 32 are as described inthe above embodiments.

For example, in FIG. 35 , stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream1-1 data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2)2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 data symbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol(N+1) 3101-(N+1), and stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2) may bedata addressed to the base station or data addressed to a terminal amonga plurality of terminals communicating with the base station. At thistime, such data may include control information.

For example, stream 2-1 data symbol (1) 3501-1, stream 2-1 data symbol(2) 3501-2, and stream 2-1 data symbol (3) 3501-3 in FIG. 35 may be dataaddressed to the base station or data addressed to a terminal among aplurality of terminals communicating with the base station. At thistime, such data may include control information.

Note that in FIG. 35 , stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2)2501-1-(M+2), and stream 1-2 data symbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 datasymbol (N+1) 3101-(N+1), stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2), stream2-1 data symbol (1) 3501-1, stream 2-1 data symbol (2) 3501-2, andstream 2-1 data symbol (3) 3501-3 are as described in the aboveembodiments.

In FIGS. 9, 14, 25, 31, 32, and 35 , when data symbols are transmitted,a single carrier transmission method may be used, or a multi-carriertransmission method such as OFDM may be used. In addition, temporalpositions of data symbols are not limited to the positions in FIGS. 9,14, 25, 31, 32, and 35 .

Although a description is given with reference to FIGS. 25, 31, 32, and35 , assuming that the horizontal axis indicates time, similar datatransmission can be carried out even if the horizontal axis indicatesfrequency (carrier). Note that when the horizontal axis indicatesfrequency (carrier), the base station transmits data symbols using oneor more carriers or subcarriers.

Supplementary Note 3

In a time period in which the base station transmits #1 symbol group901-1 for stream 1, #2 symbol group 901-2 for stream 1, #3 symbol group901-3 for stream 1, #1 symbol group 902-1 for stream 2, #2 symbol group902-2 for stream 2, and #3 symbol group 902-3 for stream 2 aretransmitted as shown in the frame configuration in FIG. 9 , the basestation may transmit another symbol group using a transmission beamdifferent from “a transmission beam for #1 symbol group 901-1 for stream1, a transmission beam for #2 symbol group 901-2 for stream 1, atransmission beam for #3 symbol group 901-3 for stream 1, a transmissionbeam for #1 symbol group 902-1 for stream 2, a transmission beam for #2symbol group 902-2 for stream 2, and a transmission beam for #3 symbolgroup 902-3 for stream 2”.

The base station in FIG. 3 may generate a transmission beam for theabove “other symbol group” through “signal processing by signalprocessor 102 and signal processing by weighting synthesizer 301” or“signal processing by signal processor 102 or signal processing byweighting synthesizer 301”.

Further, in a time period in which the base station transmits #1 symbolgroup 1401-1 for modulated signal 1, #2 symbol group 1401-2 formodulated signal 1, #3 symbol group 1401-3 for modulated signal 1, #1symbol group 1402-1 for modulated signal 2, #2 symbol group 1402-2 formodulated signal 2, and #3 symbol group 1402-3 for modulated signal 2 asshown in the frame configuration in FIG. 14 , the base station maytransmit another symbol group using a transmission beam different from“a transmission beam for #1 symbol group 1401-1 for modulated signal 1,a transmission beam for #2 symbol group 1401-2 for modulated signal 1, atransmission beam for #3 symbol group 1401-3 for modulated signal 1, atransmission beam for #1 symbol group 1402-1 for modulated signal 2, atransmission beam for #2 symbol group 1402-2 for modulated signal 2, anda transmission beam for #3 symbol group 1402-3 for modulated signal 2”.

At this time, the “other symbol group” may be a symbol group whichincludes a data symbol addressed to a certain terminal, may be a symbolgroup which includes a control information symbol group, or may be asymbol group which includes another data symbol for multicasting, asdescribed in other portions of the present disclosure.

The base station in FIG. 3 may generate a transmission beam for theabove “other symbol group” through “signal processing by signalprocessor 102 and signal processing by weighting synthesizer 301” or“signal processing by signal processor 102 or signal processing byweighting synthesizer 301”.

Supplementary Note 4

In time periods in which a base station transmits stream 1-1 data symbol(1) 2501-1-1, stream 1-1 data symbol (2) 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1 datasymbol (3) 2501-1-3 as shown in the frame configuration in FIG. 25 , thebase station may transmit another symbol group using a transmission beamdifferent from “transmission beams for transmitting stream 1-1 datasymbol (1) 2501-1-1, stream 1-1 data symbol (2) 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1data symbol (3) 2501-1-3”.

Note that the same also applies to the case where the horizontal axisindicates frequency in FIG. 25 , and in time periods in which the basestation transmits stream 1-1 data symbol (1) 2501-1-1, stream 1-1 datasymbol (2) 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1 data symbol (3) 2501-1-3, the basestation may transmit another symbol group using a transmission beamdifferent from “transmission beams for transmitting stream 1-1 datasymbol (1) 2501-1-1, stream 1-1 data symbol (2) 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1data symbol (3) 2501-1-3”.

In time periods in which the base station transmits stream 1-1 datasymbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), andstream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2) as shown in the frameconfiguration in FIGS. 31 and 32 , the base station may transmit anothersymbol group using a transmission beam different from “transmissionbeams for transmitting stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), and stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2)2501-1-(M+2)”.

Note that the same also applies to the case where the horizontal axisindicates frequency in FIGS. 31 and 32 , and in time periods in whichthe base station transmits stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream1-1 data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), and stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2)2501-1-(M+2), the base station may transmit another symbol group using atransmission beam different from “transmission beams for transmittingstream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1)2501-1-(M+1), and stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2)”.

In time periods in which the base station transmits stream 1-2 datasymbol (1) 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) 3101-2, and stream 1-2data symbol (3) 3101-3 as shown in the frame configuration in FIGS. 31and 32 , the base station may transmit another symbol group using atransmission beam different from “transmission beams for transmittingstream 1-2 data symbol (1) 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) 3101-2,and stream 1-2 data symbol (3) 3101-3”.

Note that in FIGS. 31 and 32 , the same also applies to the case wherethe horizontal axis indicates frequency in FIGS. 31 and 32 , and in timeperiods in which the base station transmits stream 1-2 data symbol (1)3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) 3101-2, and stream 1-2 data symbol(3) 3101-3, the base station may transmit another symbol group using atransmission beam different from transmission beams for transmitting“stream 1-2 data symbol (1) 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) 3101-2,and stream 1-2 data symbol (3) 3101-3”.

In time periods in which the base station transmits stream 1-1 datasymbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) 2501-(M+1), and stream1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-(M+2) as shown in the frame configuration inFIG. 35 , the base station may transmit another symbol group using atransmission beam different from transmission beams for transmitting“stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1)2501-(M+1), and stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-(M+2)”.

Note that in FIG. 35 , the same also applies to the case where thehorizontal axis indicates frequency, and in time periods in which thebase station transmits stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1data symbol (M+1) 2501-(M+1), and stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2)2501-(M+2), the base station may transmit another symbol group using atransmission beam different from “transmission beams for transmittingstream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1)2501-(M+1), and stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-(M+2)”.

In time periods in which the base station transmits stream 1-2 datasymbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol (N+1) 3101-(N+1), and stream1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2) as shown in the frame configuration inFIG. 35 , the base station may transmit another symbol group using atransmission beam different from “transmission beams for transmittingstream 1-2 data symbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol (N+1)3101-(N+1), and stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2)”.

Note that the same also applies to the case where the horizontal axisindicates frequency in FIG. 35 , and in time periods in which the basestation transmits stream 1-2 data symbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 datasymbol (N+1) 3101-(N+1), and stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2),the base station may transmit another symbol group using a transmissionbeam different from “transmission beams for transmitting stream 1-2 datasymbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol (N+1) 3101-(N+1), and stream1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2)”.

In time periods in which the base station transmits stream 2-1 datasymbol (1) 3501-1, stream 2-1 data symbol (2) 3501-2, and stream 2-1data symbol (3) 3501-3 as shown in the frame configuration in FIG. 35 ,the base station may transmit another symbol group using a transmissionbeam different from “transmission beams for transmitting stream 2-1 datasymbol (1) 3501-1, stream 2-1 data symbol (2) 3501-2, and stream 2-1data symbol (3) 3501-3”.

Note that the same also applies to the case where the horizontal axisindicates frequency in FIG. 35 , and in time periods in which the basestation transmits stream 2-1 data symbol (1) 3501-1, stream 2-1 datasymbol (2) 3501-2, and stream 2-1 data symbol (3) 3501-3, the basestation may transmit another symbol group using a transmission beamdifferent from “transmission beams for transmitting stream 2-1 datasymbol (1) 3501-1, stream 2-1 data symbol (2) 3501-2, and stream 2-1data symbol (3) 3501-3”.

In the above, the “other symbol group” may be a symbol group whichincludes a data symbol addressed to a certain terminal, or may be asymbol group which includes a control information symbol or a symbolgroup which includes another data symbol for multicasting, as describedin other portions of the specification.

At this time, the base station in FIG. 1 may generate a transmissionbeam for the above “other symbol group” through signal processing bysignal processor 102, or may generate a transmission beam for the above“other symbol group” by selecting antennas from antenna unit 106-1 toantenna unit 106-M.

The base station in FIG. 3 may generate a transmission beam for theabove “other symbol group” through “signal processing by signalprocessor 102 and signal processing by weighting synthesizer 301” or“signal processing by signal processor 102 or signal processing byweighting synthesizer 301”.

Then, unicast transmitting intervals 2503-1 and 2503-2 as illustrated inFIGS. 25, 31, and 32 may not be set.

Supplementary Note 5

A description with regard to FIGS. 31 and 32 includes the statement asfollows.

-   “Stream 1-1 data symbol (M) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-M, “stream    1-1 data symbol (M+1) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+1), “stream 1-1    data symbol (M+2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+2), “stream 1-2 data    symbol (1) (for multicasting)” 3101-1, “stream 1-2 data symbol (2)    (for multicasting)” 3101-2, and “stream 1-2 data symbol (3) (for    multicasting)” 3101-3 are all data symbols for transmitting “stream    1”.-   A terminal can obtain “data of stream 1” by obtaining “data symbols    for stream 1-1”. Furthermore, a terminal can obtain “data of stream    1” by obtaining “data symbols for stream 1-2”.

A description with regard to FIG. 35 includes the following statement.

-   “Stream 1-1 data symbol (M) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-M, “stream    1-1 data symbol (M+1) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+1), “stream 1-1    data symbol (M+2) (for multicasting)” 2501-1-(M+2), “stream 1-2 data    symbol (N) (for multicasting)” 3101-N, “stream 1-2 data symbol (N+1)    (for multicasting)” 3101-(N+1), and “stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2)    (for multicasting)” 3101-(N+2) are all data symbols to transmit    “stream 1”.-   A terminal can obtain “data of stream 1” by obtaining “data symbols    for stream 1-1”. Furthermore, a terminal can obtain “data of stream    1” by obtaining “data symbols for stream 1-2”.

The following gives a supplementary description with regard to theabove. For example, in FIG. 35 , the above can be achieved using <method1-1>, <method 1-2>, <method 2-1>, or <method 2-2> as below.

<Method 1-1>

-   Stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M and stream 1-2 data symbol (N)    3101-N include the same data.

Then, stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1) and stream 1-2 datasymbol (N+1) 3101-(N+1) include the same data.

Stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2) and stream 1-2 data symbol(N+2) 3101-(N+2) include the same data.

<Method 1-2>

-   Stream 1-2 data symbol (L) 3101-L which includes the same data as    the data included in stream 1-1 data symbol (K) 2501-1-K is present.    Note that K and L are integers.

<Method 2-1>

-   Stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M and stream 1-2 data symbol (N)    3101-N include the same data in part.

Then, stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1) and stream 1-2 datasymbol (N+1) 3101-(N+1) include the same data in part.

Stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2) and stream 1-2 data symbol(N+2) 3101-(N+2) include the same data in part.

<Method 2-2>

-   Stream 1-2 data symbol (L) 3101-L which includes a part of data    included in stream 1-1 data symbol (K) 2501-1-K is present. Note    that K and L are integers.

Specifically, a first base station or a first transmission systemgenerates a first packet group which includes data of a first stream,and a second packet group which includes data of the first stream,transmits a packet included in the first packet group in a first periodusing a first transmission beam, and transmits a packet included in thesecond packet group in a second period using a second transmission beamdifferent from the first transmission beam. The first period and thesecond period do not overlap.

Here, the second packet group may include a second packet which includesdata same as data included in a first packet included in the firstpacket group. As a configuration different from the above, the secondpacket group may include a third packet which includes data same as apart of the data included in the first packet included in the firstpacket group.

The first transmission beam and the second transmission beam may betransmission beams transmitted using the same antenna unit and havingdifferent directivities, or may be transmission beams transmitted usingdifferent antenna units.

In addition to the configuration of the first base station or the firsttransmission system, a second base station or a second transmissionsystem further generates a third packet group which includes data of thefirst stream, and transmits a packet included in the third packet groupin a third period using a third transmission beam different from thefirst transmission beam and the second transmission beam. The thirdperiod does not overlap the first period and the second period.

Here, the second base station or the second transmission system mayrepeatedly set the first period, the second period, and the third periodin a predetermined order.

Further, in addition to the configuration of the first base station orthe first transmission system, the third base station or the thirdtransmission system further generates a third packet group whichincludes data of the first stream, and transmits a packet included inthe third packet group in the third period using the third transmissionbeam different from the first transmission beam and the secondtransmission beam. At least a portion of the third period overlaps thefirst period.

Here, the third base station or the third transmission system mayrepeatedly set the first period, the second period, and the thirdperiod, the third periods repeatedly set may each at least partiallyoverlap the first period, or at least one of the third periodsrepeatedly set may not overlap the first period(s).

Further, in addition to the configuration of the first base station orthe first transmission system, a fourth base station or a fourthtransmission system further generates a fourth packet which includesdata of a second stream, and transmits the fourth packet in a fourthperiod using a fourth transmission beam different from the firsttransmission beam. At least a portion of the fourth period overlaps thefirst period.

Note that the first period and the second period do not overlap in theabove description, yet the first period and the second period maypartially overlap, the entire first period may overlap the secondperiod, or the entire first period may overlap the entire second period.

A fifth base station or a fifth transmission system may generate one ormore packet groups each of which includes data of the first stream,transmit the one or more packet groups using a different transmissionbeam for each packet group, and increase or decrease the number ofpacket groups to be generated, based on a signal transmitted from aterminal.

Note that the above describes “streams”, yet as described in otherportions of the specification, “stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M,stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2)2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 data symbol (1) 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol(2) 3101-2, and stream 1-2 data symbol (3) 3101-3” in FIGS. 31 and 32 ,and “stream 1-1 data symbol (M) 2501-1-M, stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1)2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol (M+2) 2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 datasymbol (N) 3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol (N+1) 3101-(N+1), and stream1-2 data symbol (N+2) 3101-(N+2)” in FIG. 35 may be symbols whichinclude data symbols addressed to a certain terminal, symbols whichinclude a control information symbol, or symbols which include a datasymbol for multicasting.

Embodiment 4

The present embodiment is to describe specific examples of thecommunication system described in Embodiments 1 to 3.

The communication system according to the present embodiment includes abase station (or a plurality of base stations) and a plurality ofterminals. For example, consider a communication system which includes,for instance, base station 700 as illustrated in, for instance, FIGS. 7,12, 17, 19, 20, 26, and 29 and terminals 704-1 and 704-2.

FIG. 37 illustrates an example of a configuration of a base station(700).

Logical channel generator 3703 receives inputs of data 3701 and controldata 3702, and outputs logical channel signal 3704. For example, thechannel for logical channel signal 3704 is constituted by at least oneof “a broadcast control channel (BCCH), a paging control channel (PCCH),a common control channel (CCCH), a multicast control channel (MCCH), anda dedicated control channel (DCCH)” which are logical channels forcontrol, and “a dedicated traffic channel (DTCH) and a multicast trafficchannel (MTCH)” which are logical channels for data.

Note that “a BCCH is a downlink channel for informing system controlinformation”, “a PCCH is a downlink channel for paging information”, “aCCCH is a downlink common control channel used when radio resourcecontrol (RRC) connection is not present”, “an MCCH is apoint-to-multipoint downlink control channel for multicast channelscheduling for multimedia broadcast multicast service (MBMS)”, “a DCCHis a downlink dedicated control channel used by a terminal with RRCconnection”, “a DTCH is a downlink dedicated traffic channel of a userequipment (UE) terminal or a downlink user-data dedicated channel”, and“an MTCH is a point-to-multipoint downlink channel for MBMS user data”.

Transport channel generator 3705 receives inputs of logical channelsignal 3704, and generates and outputs transport channel signal 3706.The channel for transport channel signal 3706 is constituted by, forexample, at least one of a broadcast channel (BCH), a downlink sharedchannel (DL-SCH), a paging channel (PCH), and a multicast channel (MCH),for instance.

Note that “a BCH is a channel for system information notified throughoutthe entire cell”, “a DL-SCH is a channel for which user data, controlinformation, and system information are used”, “a PCH is a channel forpaging information notified throughout the entire cell”, and “an MCH isa control channel for MBMS traffic notified throughout the entire cell”.

Physical channel generator 3707 receives inputs of transport channelsignal 3706, and generates and outputs physical channel signal 3708. Thechannel for physical channel signal 3708 is constituted by, for example,at least one of a physical broadcast channel (PBCH), a physicalmulticast channel (PMCH), a physical downlink shared channel (PDSCH),and a physical downlink control channel (PDCCH), for instance.

Note that “a PBCH is for BCH transport channel transmission”, “a PMCH isfor MCH transport channel transmission”, “a PDSCH is for DL-SCH andtransport channel transmission”, and “a PDCCH is for transmission ofdownlink Layer 1 (L1)/Layer 2 (L2) control signal”.

Modulated signal generator 3709 receives inputs of physical channelsignal 3708, and generates and outputs modulated signal 3710 based onphysical channel signal 3708. Then, base station 700 transmits modulatedsignal 3710 as a radio wave.

First, consider the case where the base station performs unicastcommunication with the plurality of terminals, or in other words,communicates separately with the plurality of terminals.

At this time, for example, the channels for symbol group #1 for stream 1indicated by 901-1, symbol group #2 for stream 1 indicated by 901-2, andsymbol group #3 for stream 1 indicated by 901-3 in FIG. 9 may bebroadcast channels (that is, channels used for control information whichthe base station transmits to the plurality of terminals by broadcastingin order to perform data communication with the plurality of terminals).Note that control information is to be used to, for example, establishdata communication between the base station and a terminal.

Here, broadcast channels are to be described. A broadcast channelcorresponds to a “PBCH”, a “PMCH”, or “a portion of a PD-SCH” amongphysical channels (for physical channel signal 3708).

A broadcast channel corresponds to a “BCH”, “a portion of a DL-SCH”, “aPCH”, or “a MCH” among transport channels (for transport channel signal3706).

A broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCCH”, “a CCCH”, “an MCCH”, “aportion of a DTCH”, or “an MTCH” among logical channels (for logicalchannel signal 3704).

Similarly, for example, the channels for symbol group #1 for stream 2indicated by 902-1, symbol group #2 for stream 2 indicated by 902-2, andsymbol group #3 for stream 2 indicated by 902-3 in FIG. 9 may bebroadcast channels (that is, channels used for control information whichthe base station transmits to the plurality of terminals by broadcastingin order to perform data communication with the plurality of terminals).Note that control information is to be used to, for example, establishdata communication between the base station and a terminal.

Note that a broadcast channel corresponds to “a PBCH”, “a PMCH”, or “aportion of a PD-SCH” among physical channels (for physical channelsignal 3708).

Further, a broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCH”, “a portion of aDL-SCH”, “a PCH”, or “an MCH” among transport channels (for transportchannel signal 3706).

A broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCCH”, “a CCCH”, “an MCCH”, “aportion of a DTCH”, or “an MTCH” among logical channels (for logicalchannel signal 3704).

At this time, features of symbol group #1 for stream 1 indicated by901-1, symbol group #2 for stream 1 indicated by 901-2, and symbol group#3 for stream 1 indicated by 901-3 in FIG. 9 are as described in theabove embodiments, and furthermore, features of symbol group #1 forstream 2 indicated by 902-1, symbol group #2 for stream 2 indicated by902-2, and symbol group #3 for stream 2 indicated by 902-3 in FIG. 9 areas described in the above embodiments.

Note that stream 2 may not be transmitted since symbol group #1 forstream 2 (902-1), symbol group #2 for stream 2 (902-2), and symbol group#3 for stream 2 (902-3) in FIG. 9 are not transmitted. In particular,when a signal having a broadcast channel is transmitted, the basestation may not transmit a symbol group for stream 2 (at this time, basestation 701 does not transmit 703-1, 703-2, and 703-3 in FIG. 7 , forexample).

For example, symbol group #1 for modulated signal 1 indicated by 1401-1,symbol group #2 for modulated signal 1 indicated by 1401-2, and symbolgroup #3 for modulated signal 1 indicated by 1401-3 in FIG. 14 may bebroadcast channels (that is, control information which the base stationtransmits to the plurality of terminals by broadcasting in order toperform data communication with the plurality of terminals). Note thatcontrol information is to be used to, for example, establish datacommunication between the base station and a terminal.

Note that a broadcast channel corresponds to “a PBCH”, “a PMCH”, or “aportion of a PD-SCH” among the physical channels (for physical channelsignal 3708).

A broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCH”, “a portion of a DL-SCH”, “aPCH”, or “an MCH” among transport channels (for transport channel signal3706).

A broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCCH”, “a CCCH”, “an MCCH”, “aportion of a DTCH”, or “an MTCH” among the logical channels (for logicalchannel signal 3704).

For example, symbol group #1 for modulated signal 2 indicated by 1402-1,symbol group #2 for modulated signal 2 indicated by 1402-2, and symbolgroup #3 for modulated signal 2 indicated by 1402-3 in FIG. 14 may bebroadcast channels (that is, control information which the base stationtransmits to the plurality of terminals by broadcasting in order toperform data communication with the plurality of terminals). Note thatcontrol information is to be used to, for example, establish datacommunication between the base station and a terminal.

Note that a broadcast channel corresponds to “a PBCH”, “a PMCH”, or “aportion of a PD-SCH” among the physical channels (for physical channelsignal 3708).

Further, a broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCH”, “a portion of aDL-SCH”, “a PCH”, or “an MCH” among the transport channels (fortransport channel signal 3706).

A broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCCH”, “a CCCH”, “an MCCH”, “aportion of a DTCH”, or “an MTCH” among the logical channels (for logicalchannel signal 3704).

Note that features of symbol group #1 for modulated signal 1 indicatedby 1401-1, symbol group #2 for modulated signal 1 indicated by 1401-2,and symbol group #3 for modulated signal 1 indicated by 1401-3 in FIG.14 are as described in the above embodiments, and symbol group #1 formodulated signal 2 indicated by 1402-1, symbol group #2 for modulatedsignal 2 indicated by 1402-2, and symbol group #3 for modulated signal 2indicated by 1402-3 in FIG. 14 are as described in the aboveembodiments.

For example, stream 1-1 data symbol (1) indicated by 2501-1-1, stream1-1 data symbol (2) indicated by 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1 data symbol(3) indicated by 2501-1-3 in FIG. 25 may be broadcast channels (that is,control information which the base station transmits to the plurality ofterminals by broadcasting in order to perform data communication withthe plurality of terminals). Note that control information is to be usedto, for example, establish data communication between the base stationand a terminal.

Note that a broadcast channel corresponds to “a PBCH”, “a PMCH”, or “aportion of a PD-SCH” among the physical channels (for physical channelsignal 3708).

Further, a broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCH”, “a portion of aDL-SCH”, “a PCH”, or “an MCH” among the transport channels (fortransport channel signal 3706).

A broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCCH”, “a CCCH”, “an MCCH”, “aportion of a DTCH”, or “an MTCH” among the logical channels (for logicalchannel signal 3704).

Note that features of stream 1-1 data symbol (1) indicated by 2501-1-1,stream 1-1 data symbol (2) indicated by 2501-1-2, and stream 1-1 datasymbol (3) indicated by 2501-1-3 in FIG. 25 are as described in theabove embodiments.

For example, stream 1-1 data symbol (M) indicated by 2501-1-M, stream1-1 data symbol (M+1) indicated by 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol(M+2) indicated by 2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 data symbol (1) indicated by3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) indicated by 3101-2, and stream 1-2data symbol (3) indicated by 3101-3 in FIGS. 31 and 32 may be broadcastchannels (that is, control information which the base station transmitsto the plurality of terminals by broadcasting in order to perform datacommunication with the plurality of terminals). Note that controlinformation is to be used to, for example, establish data communicationbetween the base station and a terminal.

Note that a broadcast channel corresponds to “a PBCH”, “a PMCH”, or “aportion of a PD-SCH” among the physical channels (for physical channelsignal 3708).

Further, a broadcast channels corresponds to “a BCH”, “a portion of aDL-SCH”, “a PCH”, or “an MCH” among the transport channels (fortransport channel signal 3706).

A broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCCH”, “a CCCH”, “an MCCH”, “aportion of a DTCH”, or “an MTCH” among the logical channels (for logicalchannel signal 3704).

Note that features of stream 1-1 data symbol (M) indicated by 2501-1-M,stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) indicated by 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 datasymbol (M+2) indicated by 2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 data symbol (1)indicated by 3101-1, stream 1-2 data symbol (2) indicated by 3101-2, andstream 1-2 data symbol (3) indicated by 3101-3 in FIGS. 31 and 32 are asdescribed in the above embodiments.

For example, stream 1-1 data symbol (M) indicated by 2501-1-M, stream1-1 data symbol (M+1) indicated by 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 data symbol(M+2) indicated by 2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 data symbol (N) indicated by3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol (N+1) indicated by 3101-(N+1), and stream1-2 data symbol (N+2) indicated by 3101-(N+2) in FIG. 35 may bebroadcast channels (that is, control information which the base stationtransmits to the plurality of terminals by broadcasting in order toperform data communication with the plurality of terminals). Note thatcontrol information is to be used to, for example, establish datacommunication between the base station and a terminal.

Note that a broadcast channel corresponds to “a PBCH”, “a PMCH”, or “aportion of a PD-SCH” among the physical channels (for physical channelsignal 3708).

Further, a broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCH”, “a portion of aDL-SCH”, “a PCH”, or “an MCH” among the transport channels (fortransport channel signal 3706).

A broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCCH”, “a CCCH”, “an MCCH”, “aportion of a DTCH”, or “an MTCH” among the logical channels (for logicalchannel signal 3704).

For example, stream 2-1 data symbol (1) indicated by 3501-1, stream 2-1data symbol (2) indicated by 3501-2, and stream 2-1 data symbol (3)indicated by 3501-3 in FIG. 35 may be broadcast channels (that is,control information which the base station transmits to the plurality ofterminals by broadcasting in order to perform data communication withthe plurality of terminals). Note that control information is to be usedto, for example, establish data communication between the base stationand a terminal.

Note that a broadcast channel corresponds to “a PBCH”, “a PMCH”, or “aportion of a PD-SCH” among the physical channels (for physical channelsignal 3708).

Further, a broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCH”, “a portion of aDL-SCH”, “a PCH”, or “an MCH” among the transport channels (fortransport channel signal 3706).

A broadcast channel corresponds to “a BCCH”, “a CCCH”, “an MCCH”, “aportion of a DTCH”, or “an MTCH” among the logical channels (for logicalchannel signal 3704).

Note that features of stream 1-1 data symbol (M) indicated by 2501-1-M,stream 1-1 data symbol (M+1) indicated by 2501-1-(M+1), stream 1-1 datasymbol (M+2) indicated by 2501-1-(M+2), stream 1-2 data symbol (N)indicated by 3101-N, stream 1-2 data symbol (N+1) indicated by3101-(N+1), and stream 1-2 data symbol (N+2) indicated by 3101-(N+2) inFIG. 35 are as described in the above embodiments, and features ofstream 2-1 data symbol (1) indicated by 3501-1, stream 2-1 data symbol(2) indicated by 3501-2, and stream 2-1 data symbol (3) indicated by3501-3 in FIG. 35 are as described in the above embodiments.

In FIGS. 9, 14, 25, 31, 32, and 35 , when data symbols are transmitted,a single carrier transmission method may be used, or a multi-carriertransmission method such as OFDM may be used. In addition, temporalpositions of data symbols are not limited to the positions in FIGS. 9,14, 25, 31, 32, and 35 .

Although a description is given with reference to FIGS. 25, 31, 32, and35 , assuming that the horizontal axis indicates time, similar datatransmission can be carried out even if the horizontal axis indicatesfrequency (carrier). Note that when the horizontal axis indicatesfrequency (carrier), the base station transmits data symbols using oneor more carriers or subcarriers.

Note that the symbol groups for stream 1 in FIG. 9 may include data tobe transmitted to a single terminal (unicast data) (or one or moresymbols). Similarly, the symbol groups for stream 2 in FIG. 9 mayinclude data to be transmitted to a single terminal (unicast data) (orone or more symbols).

Note that the symbol groups for stream 1 in FIG. 14 may include data tobe transmitted to a single terminal (unicast data) (or one or moresymbols). Similarly, the symbol groups for stream 2 in FIG. 14 mayinclude data to be transmitted to a single terminal (unicast data) (orone or more symbols).

Note that the symbols for stream 1-1 in FIG. 25 may include data to betransmitted to a single terminal (unicast data) (or one or moresymbols). The symbols for stream 1-1 and stream 1-2 in FIGS. 31 and 32may include data to be transmitted to a single terminal (unicast data)(or one or more symbols).

A PBCH may have a configuration of “being used to transmit minimuminformation (including a system bandwidth, a system frame number, andthe number of transmission antennas) which a UE is to read first aftercell searching”, for example.

A PMCH may have a configuration of “being used to utilize amulticast-broadcast single-frequency network (MBSFN), for example”.

A PDSCH may have a configuration of “being, for example, a shareddownlink data channel for transmitting user data and for collectivelytransmitting all data, irrespective of C-plane (control plane) andU-plane (user plane)”.

A PDCCH may have a configuration of “being used to notify, for example,a user selected by eNodeB (gNodeB) (base station) through scheduling ofinformation indicating allocation of radio resources”.

Through the above implementation, in multicast and broadcast datatransmission, the base station transmits data symbols and controlinformation symbols using a plurality of transmission beams, and aterminal selectively receives a transmission beam with good qualityamong the plurality of transmission beams and receives data symbolsbased on the received transmission beam, thus achieving advantageouseffects that the terminal can achieve high data receiving quality.

Embodiment 5

The present embodiment gives a supplemental description ofconfigurations of the symbol groups for stream 1 and the symbol groupsfor stream 2 in FIG. 9 which a base station (700) transmits.

FIG. 38 illustrates an example of a frame configuration for stream 1which the base station (700) transmits, the horizontal axis indicatestime and the vertical axis indicates frequency in the frameconfiguration in FIG. 38 , and the frame configuration from time 1 totime 10 and carrier 1 to carrier 40 is illustrated. Accordingly, FIG. 38illustrates a frame configuration according to a multi-carriertransmission method such as the orthogonal frequency divisionmultiplexing (OFDM) method.

Symbol area 3801_1 for stream 1 in FIG. 38 is present from time 1 totime 10 and from carrier 1 to carrier 9.

Symbol group #i (3800_i) for stream 1 is present from time 1 to time 10and from carrier 10 to carrier 20. Note that symbol group #i (3800_i)for stream 1 corresponds to symbol group #i (901-i) for stream 1 in FIG.9 .

Symbol area 3801_2 for stream 1 is present from time 1 to time 10 andfrom carrier 21 to carrier 40.

At this time, for example, as described in Embodiment 4, for instance,when the base station transmits (unicasts), to one or more terminals,data therefor, symbol areas 3801_1 and 3801_2 for stream 1 in FIG. 38can be used.

Symbol group #i (3800_i) for stream 1 in FIG. 38 is to be used by thebase station to transmit data for multicasting, as described in, forinstance, Embodiments 1 and 4.

FIG. 39 illustrates an example of a frame configuration for stream 2which the base station (700) transmits, the horizontal axis indicatestime and the vertical axis indicates frequency in the frameconfiguration in FIG. 39 , and the frame configuration from time 1 totime 10 and carrier 1 to carrier 40 is illustrated. Accordingly, FIG. 39illustrates a frame according to a multi-carrier transmission methodsuch as the OFDM method.

Symbol area 3901_1 for stream 2 in FIG. 39 is present from time 1 totime 10 and from carrier 1 to carrier 9.

Symbol group #i (3900_i) for stream 2 is present from time 1 to time 10and from carrier 10 to carrier 20. Note that symbol group #i (3900_i)for stream 2 corresponds to symbol group #i (902-i) for stream 2 in FIG.9 .

Symbol area 3901_2 for stream 2 is present from time 1 to time 10 andfrom carrier 21 to carrier 40.

At this time, for example, as described in Embodiment 4, for instance,when the base station transmits (unicasts), to one or more terminals,data therefor, symbol areas 3901_1 and 3901_2 for stream 2 in FIG. 39can be used.

Symbol group #i (3900_i) for stream 2 in FIG. 39 is to be used by thebase station to transmit data for multicasting, as described inEmbodiments 1 and 4, for instance.

Note that the base station transmits, using the same frequency at thesame time, a symbol at time X (in the case of FIG. 38 , X is an integerin a range from 1 to 10) and carrier Y (in the case of FIG. 38 , Y is aninteger in a range from 1 to 40) in FIG. 38 , and a symbol at time X andcarrier Y in FIG. 39 .

Features of symbol group #1 for stream 1 indicated by 901-1, symbolgroup #2 for stream 1 indicated by 901-2, and symbol group #3 for stream1 indicated by 901-3 in FIG. 9 are as described in the aboveembodiments. Thus, the features of symbol group #i for stream 1 in FIG.38 are the same as the features of the symbol groups for stream 1 inFIG. 9 , and are as described in the above embodiments.

Further, features of symbol group #1 for stream 2 indicated by 902-1,symbol group #2 for stream 2 indicated by 902-2, and symbol group #3 forstream 2 indicated by 902-3 in FIG. 9 are as described in the aboveembodiments. Specifically, the features of symbol group #i for stream 2in FIG. 39 are the same as the features of the symbol groups for stream2 in FIG. 9 , and are as described in the above embodiments.

Note that if symbols are present after time 11 from carrier 10 tocarrier 20 in the frame configuration in FIGS. 38 and 39 , the symbolsmay be used for multicast transmission or dedicated data transmission(unicast transmission).

If the base station transmits a frame as in FIG. 9 using the frameconfiguration in FIGS. 38 or 39 , implementation described inEmbodiments 1 and 4 may be performed similarly.

Through the above implementation, in multicast and broadcast datatransmission, the base station transmits data symbols and controlinformation symbols using a plurality of transmission beams, and aterminal selectively receives a beam with good quality among theplurality of transmission beams and receives data symbols based on thereceived transmission beam, thus achieving advantageous effects that theterminal can achieve high data receiving quality.

Embodiment 6

The present embodiment gives a supplemental description of theconfigurations of the symbol groups for modulated signal 1 and thesymbol groups for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 that a base station(700) transmits.

FIG. 40 illustrates an example of a frame configuration for modulatedsignal 1 which the base station (700) transmits, the horizontal axisindicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency in the frameconfiguration in FIG. 40 , and the frame configuration from time 1 totime 10 and carrier 1 to carrier 40 is illustrated. Accordingly, FIG. 40illustrates a frame configuration according to a multi-carriertransmission method such as the orthogonal frequency divisionmultiplexing (OFDM) method.

Symbol area 4001_1 for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 40 is present fromtime 1 to time 10 and from carrier 1 to carrier 9.

Symbol group #i (4000_i) for modulated signal 1 is present from time 1to time 10 and from carrier 10 to carrier 20. Note that symbol group #i(4000_i) for modulated signal 1 corresponds to symbol group #i (1401-i)for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 .

Symbol area 4001_2 for modulated signal 1 is present from time 1 to time10 and from carrier 21 to carrier 40.

At this time, for example, as described in Embodiment 4, for instance,when the base station transmits (unicasts), to one or more terminals,data therefor, symbol areas 4001_1 and 4001_2 for stream 1 in FIG. 40can be used.

Then, symbol group #i (4000_i) for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 40 is tobe used by the base station to transmit data for multicasting, asdescribed in Embodiments 1 and 4, for instance.

FIG. 41 illustrates an example of a frame configuration for modulatedsignal 2 which the base station (700) transmits, the horizontal axisindicates time and the vertical axis indicates frequency in the frameconfiguration in FIG. 41 , and the frame configuration from time 1 totime 10 and carrier 1 to carrier 40 is illustrated. Accordingly, FIG. 41illustrates a frame according to a multi-carrier transmission methodsuch as the OFDM system.

Symbol area 4101_1 for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 41 is present fromtime 1 to time 10 and from carrier 1 to carrier 9.

Symbol group #i (4100_i) for modulated signal 2 is present from time 1to time 10 and from carrier 10 to carrier 20. Note that symbol group #i(4100_i) for modulated signal 2 corresponds to symbol group #i (1402-i)for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 .

Symbol area 4101_2 for modulated signal 2 is present from time 1 to time10 and from carrier 21 to carrier 40.

At this time, for example, as described in Embodiment 4, for instance,when the base station transmits (unicasts), to one or more terminals,data therefor, symbol areas 4101_1 and 4101_2 for modulated signal 2 inFIG. 41 can be used.

Then, symbol group #i (4100_i) for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 41 is tobe used by the base station to transmit data for multicasting, asdescribed in Embodiments 1 and 4, for instance.

Note that the base station transmits, using the same frequency at thesame time, a symbol at time X (in the case of FIG. 40 , X is an integerin a range from 1 to 10) and carrier Y (in the case of FIG. 40 , Y is aninteger in a range from 1 to 40) in FIG. 40 , and a symbol at time X andcarrier Y in FIG. 41 .

Then, features of symbol group #1 for stream 1 indicated by 1401_1,symbol group #2 for modulated signal 1 indicated by 1401_2, and symbolgroup #3 for modulated signal 1 indicated by 1401_3 in FIG. 14 are asdescribed in the above embodiments. Specifically, the features of symbolgroup #i for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 40 are the same as the featuresof the symbol groups for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 14 , and are asdescribed in the above embodiments.

Symbol group #1 for modulated signal 2 indicated by 1402_1, symbol group#2 for modulated signal 2 indicated by 1402_2, and symbol group #3 formodulated signal 2 indicated by 1402_3 in FIG. 14 are as described inthe above embodiments. Specifically, the features of symbol group #i formodulated signal 2 in FIG. 41 are the same as the features of the symbolgroups for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 14 , and are as described in theabove embodiments.

Note that if symbols are present after time 11 from carrier 10 tocarrier 20 in the frame configuration in FIGS. 40 and 41 , the symbolsmay be used for multicast transmission or dedicated data transmission(unicast transmission).

When the base station transmits a frame as in FIG. 14 using the frameconfiguration in FIGS. 40 or 41 , data transmission described inEmbodiments 1 and 4 may be similarly carried out.

Examples of use of symbol areas 3801_1 and 3801_2 for stream 1 in FIG.38 , symbol areas 3901_1 and 3901_2 for stream 2 in FIG. 39 , symbolareas 4001_1 and 4001_2 for modulated signal 1 in FIG. 40 , and symbolareas 4101_1 and 4102_2 for modulated signal 2 in FIG. 41 in the abovedescription are to be described.

FIG. 42 illustrates an example of allocation of “symbol areas 3801_1 and3801_2 for stream 1 in FIG. 38 , symbol areas 3901_1 and 3901_2 forstream 2 in FIG. 39 , symbol areas 4001_1 and 4001_2 for modulatedsignal 1 in FIG. 40 , and symbol areas 4101_1 and 4102_2 for modulatedsignal 2 in FIG. 41 ” to terminals. Note that in FIG. 42 , thehorizontal axis indicates time, and the vertical axis indicatesfrequency (carrier).

As illustrated in FIG. 42 , for example, “symbol areas 3801_1 and 3801_2for stream 1 in FIG. 38 , symbol areas 3901_1 and 3901_2 for stream 2 inFIG. 39 , symbol areas 4001_1 and 4001_2 for modulated signal 1 in FIG.40 , and symbol areas 4101_1 and 4102_2 for modulated signal 2 in FIG.41 ” are subjected to frequency division, and allocated to theterminals. 4201_1 is a symbol group allocated to terminal #1, 4201_2 isa symbol group allocated to terminal #2, and 4201_3 is a symbol groupallocated to terminal #3.

For example, the base station (700) communicates with terminal #1,terminal #2, and terminal #3, and when the base station transmits datato terminal #1, the base station transmits data to terminal #1, using“symbol group 4201_1 allocated to terminal #1” in FIG. 42 . When thebase station transmits data to terminal #2, the base station transmitsdata to terminal #2 using “symbol group 4201_2 allocated to terminal #2”in FIG. 42 . When the base station transmits data to terminal #3, thebase station transmits data to terminal #3 using “symbol group 4201_3allocated to terminal #3” in FIG. 42 .

Note that the method of allocating symbol groups to terminals is notlimited to the method in FIG. 42 , and thus the frequency band (thecarrier number) may be changed with time or may be set in any manner.Furthermore, the method of allocating symbol groups to terminals may bechanged with time.

FIG. 43 illustrates an example of allocation of “symbol areas 3801_1 and3801_2 for stream 1 in FIG. 38 , symbol areas 3901_1 and 3901_2 forstream 2 in FIG. 39 , symbol areas 4001_1 and 4001_2 for modulatedsignal 1 in FIG. 40 , and symbol areas 4101_1 and 4102_2 for modulatedsignal 2 in FIG. 41 ” to terminals, which is different from theallocation in FIG. 42 . Note that in FIG. 43 , the horizontal axisindicates time, and the vertical axis indicates frequency (carrier).

As illustrated in FIG. 43 , for example, “symbol areas 3801_1 and 3801_2for stream 1 in FIG. 38 , symbol areas 3901_1 and 3901_2 for stream 2 inFIG. 39 , symbol areas 4001_1 and 4001_2 for modulated signal 1 in FIG.40 , and symbol areas 4101_1 and 4102_2 for modulated signal 2 in FIG.41 ” are subjected to time and frequency division, and allocated to theterminals. Then, 4301_1 is a symbol group allocated to terminal #1,4301_2 is a symbol group allocated to terminal #2, 4301_3 is a symbolgroup allocated to terminal #3, 4301_4 is a symbol group allocated toterminal #4, 4301_5 is a symbol group allocated to terminal #5, and4301_6 is a symbol group allocated to terminal #6.

For example, the base station (700) communicates with terminal #1,terminal #2, terminal #3, terminal #4, terminal #5, and terminal #6, andwhen the base station transmits data to terminal #1, the base stationtransmits data to terminal #1, using “symbol group 4301_1 allocated toterminal #1” in FIG. 43 . Then, when the base station transmits data toterminal #2, the base station transmits data to terminal #2 using“symbol group 4301_2 allocated to terminal #2” in FIG. 43 . When thebase station transmits data to terminal #3, the base station transmitsdata to terminal #3 using “symbol group 4301_3 allocated to terminal #3”in FIG. 43 . When the base station transmits data to terminal #4, thebase station transmits data to terminal #4 using “symbol group 4301_4allocated to terminal #4” in FIG. 43 . When the base station transmitsdata to terminal #5, the base station transmits data to terminal #5using “symbol group 4301_5 allocated to terminal #5” in FIG. 43 . Whenthe base station transmits data to terminal #6, the base stationtransmits data to terminal #6 using “symbol group 4301_6 allocated toterminal #6” in FIG. 43 .

Note that the method of allocating symbol groups to terminals is notlimited to the method in FIG. 43 , and thus the frequency band (thecarrier number) and the time width may be changed or may be set in anymanner. Furthermore, the method of allocating symbol groups to terminalsmay be changed with time.

Further, different weighting synthesis may be performed for each carrierin the symbol areas for stream 1, the symbol areas for stream 2, thesymbol areas for modulated signal 1, the symbol areas for modulatedsignal 2 in FIGS. 38, 39, 40, and 41 , respectively, and aweighting-synthesis method may be determined for a unit of a pluralityof carriers. As illustrated in FIGS. 43 and 44 , a weighting synthesisparameter may be set for each allocated terminal. Setting of theweighting synthesis method for carriers is not limited to theseexamples.

Through the above implementation, in multicast and broadcast datatransmission, the base station transmits data symbols and controlinformation symbols using a plurality of transmission beams, and aterminal selectively receives a beam with good quality among theplurality of transmission beams and receives data symbols based on thereceived transmission beam, thus achieving advantageous effects that theterminal can achieve high data receiving quality.

Embodiment 7

In this specification, the configurations of base stations 700 in FIGS.7, 12, 17, 18, 19, 20, and 22 and the configurations of the basestations described in other embodiments may each be a configuration asillustrated in FIG. 44 .

The following describes operation of the base station in FIG. 44 .Elements which operate in the same manner as those in FIGS. 1 and 3 areassigned the same reference numerals in FIG. 44 , and a descriptionthereof is omitted.

Weighting synthesizer 301 receives inputs of signals 103_1, 103_2, ...,and 103_M obtained as a result of signal processing, and control signal159, performs weighting synthesis on the signals based on control signal159, and outputs weighting-synthesis signals 4401_1, 4401_2, ..., and4401_K. Note that M is an integer of 2 or more, and K is an integer of 2or more.

For example, if signal 103_i obtained as a result of the signalprocessing (i is an integer of 1 or more and M or less) is representedby ui(t) (t is time) and signal 4401_g (g is an integer of 1 or more andK or less) obtained as a result of the weighting synthesis isrepresented by vg(t), vg (t) can be represented by the followingexpression. [Math. 7]

$\begin{matrix}\begin{matrix}{v_{g}(t) = Q_{g1} \times u_{1}(t) + Q_{g2} \times u_{2}(t) + \cdots + Q_{gM} \times u_{M}(t)} \\{= {\sum\limits_{j = 1}^{M}{Q_{gj} \times u_{j}(t)}}}\end{matrix} & \text{­­­Expression (7)}\end{matrix}$

Wireless communication unit 104_g receives inputs of signal 4401_gobtained as a result of the weighting synthesis and control signal 159,performs predetermined processing on the signal based on control signal159, and generates and outputs transmission signal 105_g. Then,transmission signal 105_g is transmitted from antenna 303_1.

Note that the transmission method which the base station supports may bea multi-carrier method such as OFDM or a single carrier method.Furthermore, the base station may support both the multi-carrier methodand the single carrier method. At this time, there are methods forgenerating modulated signals to be transmitted according to the singlecarrier method, and signals generated according to any of the methodscan be transmitted. Examples of the single carrier method include“discrete Fourier transform (DFT)-spread orthogonal frequency divisionmultiplexing (OFDM)”, “trajectory constrained DFT-spread OFDM”, “OFDMbased single carrier (SC)”, “single carrier (SC)-frequency divisionmultiple access (FDMA)”, and “guard interval DFT-spread OFDM”.

Expression (7) is indicated by the function of time, yet Expression (7)may be a function of frequency in addition to time in the case of amulti-carrier method such as the OFDM method.

For example, according to the OFDM method, different weighting synthesismay be performed for each carrier, and a weighting-synthesis method maybe determined for a unit of a plurality of carriers. Setting of theweighting synthesis method for carriers is not limited to theseexamples.

Supplementary Note 6

As a matter of course, the present disclosure may be carried out bycombining a plurality of the exemplary embodiments and other contentssuch as supplementary notes described herein.

As the configuration of the base station, the examples of theconfiguration are not limited to those in FIGS. 1 and 3 , and as long asthe base station includes a plurality of transmission antennas andgenerates and transmits a plurality of transmission beams (transmissiondirectivity beams), the present disclosure can be carried out with sucha base station.

Moreover, the exemplary embodiments are mere examples. For example,while a “modulating method, an error correction coding method (an errorcorrection code, a code length, a coding rate and the like to be used),control information and the like” are exemplified, it is possible tocarry out the present disclosure with the same configuration even whenother types of “a modulating method, an error correction coding method(an error correction code, a code length, a coding rate and the like tobe used), control information and the like” are applied.

As for a modulating method, even when a modulating method other than themodulating methods described herein is used, it is possible to carry outthe exemplary embodiments and the other contents described herein. Forexample, APSK (such as 16APSK, 64APSK, 128APSK, 256APSK, 1024APSK, and4096APSK), PAM (such as 4PAM, 8PAM, 16PAM, 64PAM, 128PAM, 256PAM,1024PAM and 4096PAM), PSK (such as BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, 16PSK, 64PSK,128PSK, 256PSK, 1024PSK and 4096PSK), and QAM (such as 4QAM, 8QAM,16QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, 256QAM, 1024QAM and 4096QAM) may be applied, or ineach modulating method, uniform mapping or non-uniform mapping may beperformed. Moreover, a method for arranging signal points, such as 2signal points, 4 signal points, 8 signal points, 16 signal points, 64signal points, 128 signal points, 256 signal points, and 1024 signalpoints on an I-Q plane (a modulating method having signal points such as2 signal points, 4 signal points, 8 signal points, 16 signal points, 64signal points, 128 signal points, 256 signal points, and 1024 signalpoints) is not limited to a signal point arranging method of themodulating methods described herein.

Herein, it can be considered that communication/broadcast apparatuses,such as a broadcast station, a base station, an access point, aterminal, and a mobile phone, each include the transmitting device. Inthis case, it can be considered that communication apparatuses, such asa television, a radio, a terminal, a personal computer, a mobile phone,an access point, and a base station, each include the receiving device.Moreover, it can be also considered that each of the transmitting deviceand the receiving device according to the present disclosure is anapparatus having communication functions and has a form connectable viaany interface to devices for running applications such as a television,a radio, a personal computer, and a mobile phone. Moreover, in thepresent exemplary embodiment, symbols other than data symbols, forexample, pilot symbols (such as preambles, unique words, postambles, andreference symbols), and control information symbols may be arranged inframes in any way. Then, these symbols are named a pilot symbol and acontrol information symbol here, but may be named in any way, and afunction itself is important.

Moreover, the pilot symbol only needs to be a known symbol modulated byusing PSK modulation in a transmitting device and a receiving device.The receiving device performs frequency synchronization, timesynchronization, channel estimation of each modulated signal (estimationof CSI (Channel State Information)), signal detection, and the like byusing this symbol. Alternatively, the pilot symbol may allow thereceiving device to learn a symbol transmitted by the transmittingdevice by establishing synchronization.

Moreover, the control information symbol is a symbol for transmittinginformation that is used for realizing communication other thancommunication for data (data of an application, for instance) and thatis to be transmitted to a communicating party (for example, a modulatingmethod used for communication, an error correction coding method, acoding rate of the error correction coding method, setting informationin an upper layer, and the like).

Note that the present disclosure is not limited to the exemplaryembodiments, and can be carried out with various modifications. Forexample, the case where the present disclosure is performed as acommunication device is described in the exemplary embodiments. However,the present disclosure is not limited to this case, and thiscommunication method can also be used as software.

Note that a program for executing the above-described communicationmethod may be stored in a ROM in advance, and a CPU may be caused tooperate this program.

Moreover, the program for executing the communication method may bestored in a computer-readable storage medium, the program stored in therecording medium may be recorded in a RAM of a computer, and thecomputer may be caused to operate according to this program.

Then, the configurations of the above-described exemplary embodiments,for instance, may be each realized as an LSI (Large Scale Integration)which is typically an integrated circuit having an input terminal and anoutput terminal. The configurations may be separately formed as onechip, or all or at least one of the configurations of the exemplaryembodiments may be formed as one chip. The LSI is described here, butthe integrated circuit may also be referred to as an IC (IntegratedCircuit), a system LSI, a super LSI, or an ultra LSI, depending on adegree of integration. Moreover, a circuit integration technique is notlimited to the LSI, and may be realized by a dedicated circuit or ageneral purpose processor. After manufacturing of the LSI, aprogrammable FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) or a reconfigurableprocessor which is reconfigurable in connection or settings of circuitcells inside the LSI may be used. Further, when development of asemiconductor technology or another derived technology provides acircuit integration technology which replaces the LSI, as a matter ofcourse, functional blocks may be integrated by using this technology.Application of biotechnology, for instance, is one such possibility.

Various frame configurations have been described herein. For example,the base station (AP) which includes the transmitting device in FIG. 1transmits a modulated signal having a frame configuration describedherein, using a multi-carrier method such as an OFDM method. At thistime, it is conceivable to apply a method in which when a terminal(user) communicating with the base station (AP) transmits a modulatedsignal, the modulated signal may be transmitted by the terminalaccording to a single carrier method (the base station (AP) cansimultaneously transmit data symbol groups to a plurality of terminalsusing the OFDM method, and the terminal can reduce power consumption byusing a single carrier method).

A time division duplex (TDD) method in which a terminal transmits amodulation signal, using a portion of a frequency band used for amodulated signal transmitted by the base station (AP) may be applied.

The configuration of antenna units 106-1, 106-2, ..., and 106-M in FIG.1 is not limited to the configurations described in the embodiments. Forexample, antenna units 106-1, 106-2, ..., and 106-M may not each includea plurality of antennas, and may not receive an input of signal 159.

The configuration of antenna units 401-1, 401-2, ..., and 401-N in FIG.4 is not limited to the configuration described in the embodiments. Forexample, antenna units 401-1, 401-2, ..., and 401-N may not each includea plurality of antennas, and may not receive an input of signal 410.

Note that the transmission method which the base station and theterminals support may be a multi-carrier method such as OFDM or a singlecarrier method. Furthermore, the base station may support both themulti-carrier method and the single carrier method. At this time, thereare methods for generating modulated signals according to the singlecarrier method, and signals generated according to any of the methodscan be transmitted. Examples of the single carrier system include“discrete Fourier transform (DFT)-spread orthogonal frequency divisionmultiplexing (OFDM)”, “trajectory constrained DFT-spread OFDM”, “OFDMbased single carrier (SC)”, and “single carrier (SC)-frequency divisionmultiple access (FDMA)”, and “guard interval DFT-spread OFDM”.

Furthermore, at least multicast (broadcast) data is included ininformation #1 (101_1), information #2 (101_2), ..., and information #M(101_M) in FIGS. 1, 3, and 44 . For example, in FIG. 1 , if information#1 (101_1) is data for multicasting, a plurality of streams or modulatedsignals that include such data are generated by signal processor 102,and output from an antenna.

In FIG. 3 , if information #1 (101_1) is data for multicasting, aplurality of streams or modulated signals that include such data aregenerated by signal processor 102 and/or weighting synthesizer 301, andoutput from an antenna.

In FIG. 44 , if information #1 (101_1) is data for multicasting, aplurality of streams or modulated signals that include such data aregenerated by signal processor 102 and/or weighting synthesizer 301, andoutput from an antenna.

Note that the states of the streams and modulated signals are asdescribed with reference to FIGS. 7, 9, 12, 14, 17, 18, and 19 .

Furthermore, information #1 (101_1), information #2 (101_2), ..., andinformation #M (101_M) in FIGS. 1, 3, and 44 may include data addressedto individual terminals. With regard to this point, a description is asgiven in the embodiments in the specification.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which at least one of afield programmable gate array (FPGA) and a central processing unit (CPU)can download the entirety of or a portion of software necessary toachieve the communication method described in the present disclosure bywireless communication or wire communication. Furthermore, theconfiguration may allow downloading the entirety of or a portion ofsoftware for update by wireless communication or wire communication.Then, the downloaded software may be stored into a storage, and at leastone of an FPGA and a CPU may be operated based on the stored software,so that the digital signal processing described in the presentdisclosure may be performed.

At this time, a device that includes at least one of an FPGA and a CPUmay be connected with a communication modem in a wireless or wiredmanner, and this device and the communication modem may achieve thecommunication method described in the present disclosure.

For example, the base station, an access point, and communicationdevices such as terminals described in this specification may eachinclude at least one of an FPGA and a CPU, and the communication devicesmay each include an interface for receiving, from the outside, softwarefor operating at least one of the FPGA and the CPU. Furthermore, thecommunication devices may include a storage for storing the softwareobtained from the outside, and cause the FPGA and the CPU to operatebased on the stored software, thus achieving signal processing describedin the present disclosure.

Embodiment 8

In the present embodiment, an example of a case in which data held bycommunication device #A is transmitted to a plurality of communicationdevices will be given.

FIG. 45 illustrates an example of a case in which data held bycommunication device #A is transmitted to a plurality of communicationdevices. Communication device #A labeled as 4501, for example,accumulates a first file configured of first data in an accumulationunit, and communication device #A labeled as 4501 transmits the firstdata to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 transmits the first dataobtained from communication device #A labeled as 4501 to server 4506_4via network 4503.

Next, operations performed by communication device #A labeled as 4501,communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 in FIG. 45 will be describedin detail.

For example, communication device #A labeled as 4501 has theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 1 (or FIG. 3 or FIG. 44 ).Communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have, for example, theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 . Note that as operations performedby each element illustrated in FIG. 1 (FIG. 3 , FIG. 44 ) and operationsperformed by each element illustrated in FIG. 4 have already beendescribed, repeated description thereof will be omitted.

Signal processor 102 included in communication device #A labeled as 4501receives inputs of information 101-1 including first data, and controlsignal 159, and signal processing is performed based on “information ona method of error correction coding (a coding rate, a code length (blocklength))”, “information on a modulation method”, and “a transmittingmethod (multiplexing method)”, etc., that are included in control signal159.

At this time, signal processor 102 generates, based on information 101-1including first data, a signal obtained as a result of signal processingto be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, a signalobtained as a result of signal processing to be transmitted tocommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, a signal obtained as a resultof signal processing to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and a signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as4502_4. In one example, the signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as4502_1 is labeled as 103-1, the signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 is labeled as 103-2, the signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as4502_3 is labeled as 103-3, and the signal obtained as a result ofsignal processing to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeledas 4502_4 is labeled as 103-4.

Signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processing to be transmittedto communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 is transmitted from antennaunit 106-1 as transmission signal 105-1 via wireless communication unit104-1. Similarly, signal 103-2 obtained as a result of signal processingto be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 istransmitted from antenna unit 106-2 as transmission signal 105-2 viawireless communication unit 104-2, signal 103-3 obtained as a result ofsignal processing to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3 is transmitted from antenna unit 106-3 as transmission signal105-3 via wireless communication unit 104-3, and signal 103-4 obtainedas a result of signal processing to be transmitted to communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 is transmitted from antenna unit 106-4 astransmission signal 105-4 via wireless communication unit 104-4.

Next, a method for setting the frequencies of transmission signals105-1, 105-2, 105-3, and 105-4 at this time will be described withreference to FIG. 46 .

In FIG. 46 , frequency is represented on the horizontal axis, and poweris represented on the vertical axis. Transmission signals 105-1, 105-2,105-3, and 105-4 are signals having any one of a spectrum includingspectrum 4601 in a first frequency band (first channel), a spectrumincluding spectrum 4602 in a second frequency band (second channel), anda spectrum including spectrum 4603 in a third frequency band (thirdchannel).

Specific examples will be given with reference to FIG. 47 , FIG. 48 ,FIG. 49 , and FIG. 50 .

FIG. 47 illustrates a positional relationship between communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4illustrated in FIG. 45 . Accordingly, the reference signs used in FIG.45 are also used in FIG. 47 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 can use, as the spectrum to be used by transmissionsignal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , and can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 . In this way, the frequency band used by thetransmission signal to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1, the frequency band used by the transmission signal to betransmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, the frequencyband used by the transmission signal to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and the frequency band used by thetransmission signal to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeledas 4502_4 can be set to the same frequency band. This achieves theadvantageous effect that the frequency usage efficiency can be improved.

Next, the temporal presence of transmission signal 105-1 to betransmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, transmissionsignal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2, transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

FIG. 48 illustrates a positional relationship between communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4illustrated in FIG. 45 that differs from the example illustrated in FIG.47 . Accordingly, the reference signs used in FIG. 45 are also used inFIG. 48 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 48 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that is illustrated inFIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-2to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, spectrum4601 having the first frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 ,uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-3 to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4601having the first frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 , anduses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4602having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 . Atthis time, the reason why the frequency band used by transmission signal105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 andthe frequency band used by transmission signal 105-4 to be transmittedto communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 are different is becausewhen transmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequencyband used by transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted tocommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and the frequency band used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 the same, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have difficulty insplitting the beam whereby interference increases, which results in areduction in data reception quality.

This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequency usageefficiency can be improved while ensuring high data reception quality.

Next, the temporal presence of transmission signal 105-1 to betransmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, transmissionsignal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2, transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

Note that even in the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , and can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 .

FIG. 49 illustrates a positional relationship of communication device #Alabeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 thatare illustrated in FIG. 45 , that differs from the examples illustratedin FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 . Accordingly, the reference signs used in FIG.45 are also used in FIG. 49 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 49 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that is illustrated inFIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-2to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, spectrum4602 having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 ,uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-3 to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 , anduses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4603having the third frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 . At thistime, the reason why the frequency band used by transmission signal105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,the frequency band used by transmission signal 105-3 to be transmittedto communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and the frequency band usedby transmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device#4 labeled as 4502_4 are different is because when transmitting device#A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequency band used by transmissionsignal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as4502_1, the frequency band used by transmission signal 105-3 to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and thefrequency band used by transmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted tocommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 the same, communication device#1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have difficulty in splittingthe beam whereby interference increases, which results in a reduction indata reception quality.

This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequency usageefficiency can be improved while ensuring high data reception quality.

Next, the temporal presence of transmission signal 105-1 to betransmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, transmissionsignal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2, transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

Note that even in the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , and can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4603 having the third frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 .

FIG. 50 illustrates a positional relationship of communication device #Alabeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 thatare illustrated in FIG. 45 , that differs from the examples illustratedin FIG. 47 , FIG. 48 , and FIG. 49 . Accordingly, the reference signsused in FIG. 45 are also used in FIG. 50 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 50 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that is illustrated inFIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-2to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, spectrum4602 having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 ,uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-3 to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 , anduses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4601having the first frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 .

At this time, the reason why the frequency band used by transmissionsignal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as4502_1 and the frequency band used by transmission signal 105-2 to betransmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 are differentis because when transmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make thefrequency band used by transmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted tocommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 and the frequency band used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2 the same, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1and communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 have difficulty insplitting the beam whereby interference increases, which results in areduction in data reception quality.

Similarly, the reason why the frequency band used by transmission signal105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 andthe frequency band used by transmission signal 105-4 to be transmittedto communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 are different is becausewhen transmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequencyband used by transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted tocommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and the frequency band used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 the same, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have difficulty insplitting the beam whereby interference increases, which results in areduction in data reception quality.

This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequency usageefficiency can be improved while ensuring high data reception quality.

Next, the temporal presence of transmission signal 105-1 to betransmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, transmissionsignal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2, transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

Note that even in the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , and can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 .

Moreover, with the example illustrated in FIG. 50 , even whencommunication device #A labeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be usedby transmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device#1 labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , and uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4603 having the third frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , the advantageous effect that the frequencyusage efficiency can be improved while ensuring high data receptionquality can be achieved.

Furthermore, with the example illustrated in FIG. 50 , even whencommunication device #A labeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be usedby transmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device#1 labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , and uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4603 having the third frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , the advantageous effect that the frequencyusage efficiency can be improved while ensuring high data receptionquality can be achieved.

Note that communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, communicationdevice #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3,and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have, for example, theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 , receive a desired signal, andobtain desired data by causing the reception part in FIG. 4 to operate.

As described above, when transmitting the same data to a plurality ofcommunication devices, by employing any one of: (1) using a plurality ofbeams and a plurality of frequency bands; (2) using a plurality of beamsand a specific frequency band; (3) using a specific beam and a pluralityof frequency bands, it is possible to achieve high data receptionquality and achieve the advantageous effect that a high frequency usageefficiency can be achieved.

Next, a case in which communication device #A labeled as 4501 has, forexample, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 3 , and communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2,communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 have, for example, the configuration illustrated inFIG. 4 will be described.

Signal processor 102 included in communication device #A labeled as 4501receives inputs of information 101-1 including first data, and controlsignal 159, and signal processing is performed based on “information ona method of error correction coding (a coding rate, a code length (blocklength))”, “information on a modulation method”, and “a transmittingmethod (multiplexing method)”, etc., that are included in control signal159.

At this time, signal processor 102 generates, based on information 101-1including first data, a signal obtained as a result of signal processingto be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, a signalobtained as a result of signal processing to be transmitted tocommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, a signal obtained as a resultof signal processing to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and a signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as4502_4. In one example, the signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as4502_1 is labeled as 103-1, the signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 is labeled as 103-2, the signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as4502_3 is labeled as 103-3, and the signal obtained as a result ofsignal processing to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeledas 4502_4 is labeled as 103-4.

Wireless communication unit 104-1 receives an input of signal 103-1obtained as a result of signal processing to be transmitted tocommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, and outputs transmissionsignal 105-1. Similarly, wireless communication unit 104-2 receives aninput of signal 103-2 obtained as a result of signal processing to betransmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, and outputstransmission signal 105-2. Wireless communication unit 104-3 receives aninput of signal 103-3 obtained as a result of signal processing to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and outputstransmission signal 105-3. Wireless communication unit 104-4 receives aninput of signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processing to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4, and outputstransmission signal 105-4.

Weighting synthesizer 301 receives inputs of at least transmissionsignal 105-1, transmission signal 105-2, transmission signal 105-3, andtransmission signal 105-4, performs weighting synthesis calculation, andoutputs signals 302-1, 302-2, ..., and 302-K obtained as a result of theweighting synthesis, and signals 302-1, 302-2, ..., and 302-K obtainedas a result of the weighting synthesis are then output as radio wavesfrom antennas 303-1, 303-2, ..., and 303-K. Accordingly, transmissionsignal 105-1 is transmitted using one or more antennas from amongantennas 303-1, 303-2, ..., and 303-K. Similarly, transmission signal105-2 is transmitted using one or more antennas from among antennas303-1, 303-2, ..., and 303-K, transmission signal 105-3 is transmittedusing one or more antennas from among antennas 303-1, 303-2, ..., and303-K, and transmission signal 105-4 is transmitted using one or moreantennas from among antennas 303-1, 303-2, ..., and 303-K.

Note that each of antennas 303-1, 303-2, ..., and 303-K may have theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 2 .

Next, the method of setting the frequencies of transmission signals105-1, 105-2, 105-3, and 105-4 at this time will be described withreference to FIG. 46 .

In FIG. 46 , frequency is represented on the horizontal axis, and poweris represented on the vertical axis. Transmission signals 105-1, 105-2,105-3, and 105-4 are signals having any one of a spectrum includingspectrum 4601 in a first frequency band (first channel), a spectrumincluding spectrum 4602 in a second frequency band (second channel), anda spectrum including spectrum 4603 in a third frequency band (thirdchannel).

Specific examples will be given with reference to FIG. 47 , FIG. 48 ,FIG. 49 , and FIG. 50 .

FIG. 47 illustrates a positional relationship between communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4illustrated in FIG. 45 . Accordingly, the reference signs used in FIG.45 are also used in FIG. 47 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 can use, as the spectrum to be used by transmissionsignal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , and can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 . In this way, the frequency band used by thetransmission signal to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1, the frequency band used by the transmission signal to betransmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, the frequencyband used by the transmission signal to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and the frequency band used by thetransmission signal to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeledas 4502_4 can be set to the same frequency band. This achieves theadvantageous effect that the frequency usage efficiency can be improved.

Next, the temporal presence of transmission signal 105-1 to betransmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, transmissionsignal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2, transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

FIG. 48 illustrates a positional relationship between communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4illustrated in FIG. 45 that differs from the example illustrated in FIG.47 . Accordingly, the reference signs used in FIG. 45 are also used inFIG. 48 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 48 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that is illustrated inFIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-2to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, spectrum4601 having the first frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 ,uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-3 to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4601having the first frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 , anduses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4602having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 . Atthis time, the reason why the frequency band used by transmission signal105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 andthe frequency band used by transmission signal 105-4 to be transmittedto communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 are different is becausewhen transmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequencyband used by transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted tocommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and the frequency band used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 the same, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have difficulty insplitting the beam whereby interference increases, which results in areduction in data reception quality.

This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequency usageefficiency can be improved while ensuring high data reception quality.

Next, the temporal presence of transmission signal 105-1 to betransmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, transmissionsignal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2, transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

Note that even in the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , and can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 .

FIG. 49 illustrates a positional relationship of communication device #Alabeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 thatare illustrated in FIG. 45 , that differs from the examples illustratedin FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 . Accordingly, the reference signs used in FIG.45 are also used in FIG. 49 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 49 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that is illustrated inFIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-2to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, spectrum4602 having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 ,uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-3 to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 , anduses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4603having the third frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 . At thistime, the reason why the frequency band used by transmission signal105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,the frequency band used by transmission signal 105-3 to be transmittedto communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and the frequency band usedby transmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device#4 labeled as 4502_4 are different is because when transmitting device#A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequency band used by transmissionsignal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as4502_1, the frequency band used by transmission signal 105-3 to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and thefrequency band used by transmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted tocommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 the same, communication device#1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have difficulty in splittingthe beam whereby interference increases, which results in a reduction indata reception quality.

This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequency usageefficiency can be improved while ensuring high data reception quality.

Next, the temporal presence of transmission signal 105-1 to betransmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, transmissionsignal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2, transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

Note that even in the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , and can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4603 having the third frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 .

FIG. 50 illustrates a positional relationship of communication device #Alabeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 thatare illustrated in FIG. 45 , that differs from the examples illustratedin FIG. 47 , FIG. 48 , and FIG. 49 . Accordingly, the reference signsused in FIG. 45 are also used in FIG. 50 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 50 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that is illustrated inFIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-2to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, spectrum4602 having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 ,uses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-3 to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602having the second frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 , anduses, as the spectrum to be used by transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4601having the first frequency band that is illustrated in FIG. 46 .

At this time, the reason why the frequency band used by transmissionsignal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as4502_1 and the frequency band used by transmission signal 105-2 to betransmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 are differentis because when transmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make thefrequency band used by transmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted tocommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 and the frequency band used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2 the same, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1and communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 have difficulty insplitting the beam whereby interference increases, which results in areduction in data reception quality.

Similarly, the reason why the frequency band used by transmission signal105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 andthe frequency band used by transmission signal 105-4 to be transmittedto communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 are different is becausewhen transmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequencyband used by transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted tocommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and the frequency band used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 the same, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have difficulty insplitting the beam whereby interference increases, which results in areduction in data reception quality.

This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequency usageefficiency can be improved while ensuring high data reception quality.

Next, the temporal presence of transmission signal 105-1 to betransmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, transmissionsignal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2, transmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and transmission signal 105-4 to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

Note that even in the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , and can use, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 .

Moreover, with the example illustrated in FIG. 50 , even whencommunication device #A labeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be usedby transmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device#1 labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , and uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4603 having the third frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , the advantageous effect that the frequencyusage efficiency can be improved while ensuring high data receptionquality can be achieved.

Furthermore, with the example illustrated in FIG. 50 , even whencommunication device #A labeled as 4501 uses, as the spectrum to be usedby transmission signal 105-1 to be transmitted to communication device#1 labeled as 4502_1, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-2 to be transmitted to communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, spectrum 4602 having the second frequency band thatis illustrated in FIG. 46 , uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-3 to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, spectrum 4601 having the first frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , and uses, as the spectrum to be used bytransmission signal 105-4 to be transmitted to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, spectrum 4603 having the third frequency band that isillustrated in FIG. 46 , the advantageous effect that the frequencyusage efficiency can be improved while ensuring high data receptionquality can be achieved.

Note that communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, communicationdevice #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3,and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have, for example, theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 , receive a desired signal, andobtain desired data by causing the reception part in FIG. 4 to operate.

Next, a case in which communication device #A labeled as 4501 has, forexample, the configuration illustrated in FIG. 4 , and communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2,communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 have, for example, the configuration illustrated inFIG. 44 will be described.

Signal processor 102 included in communication device #A labeled as 4501receives inputs of information 101-1 including first data, and controlsignal 159, and signal processing is performed based on “information ona method of error correction coding (a coding rate, a code length (blocklength))”, “information on a modulation method”, and “a transmittingmethod (multiplexing method)”, etc., that are included in control signal159.

At this time, signal processor 102 generates, based on information 101-1including first data, a signal obtained as a result of signal processingto be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, a signalobtained as a result of signal processing to be transmitted tocommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, a signal obtained as a resultof signal processing to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and a signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as4502_4. In one example, the signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as4502_1 is labeled as 103-1, the signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 is labeled as 103-2, the signal obtained as a result of signalprocessing to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as4502_3 is labeled as 103-3, and the signal obtained as a result ofsignal processing to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeledas 4502_4 is labeled as 103-4.

Weighting synthesizer 301 receives inputs of at least signal 103-1obtained as a result of signal processing, signal 103-2 obtained as aresult of signal processing, signal 103-3 obtained as a result of signalprocessing, and signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processing,performs weighting synthesis calculation, and outputs signals 4402-1,4402-2, ..., and 4402-K obtained as a result of the weighting synthesis.Accordingly, signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processing istransmitted using one or more antennas from among antennas 303-1, 303-2,..., and 303-K. Similarly, signal 103-2 obtained as a result of signalprocessing is transmitted using one or more antennas from among antennas303-1, 303-2, ..., and 303-K, signal 103-3 obtained as a result ofsignal processing is transmitted using one or more antennas from amongantennas 303-1, 303-2, ..., and 303-K, and signal 103-4 obtained as aresult of signal processing is transmitted using one or more antennasfrom among antennas 303-1, 303-2, ..., and 303-K.

Note that each of antennas 303-1, 303-2, ..., and 303-K may have theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 2 .

Next, the method of setting the frequencies of signals 103-1, 103-2,103-3, and 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processing at this timewill be described with reference to FIG. 46 .

In FIG. 46 , frequency is represented on the horizontal axis, and poweris represented on the vertical axis. Signals 103-1, 103-2, 103-3, and103-4 obtained as a result of signal processing are, after frequencyconversion, signals having any one of a spectrum including spectrum 4601in a first frequency band (first channel), a spectrum including spectrum4602 in a second frequency band (second channel), and a spectrumincluding spectrum 4603 in a third frequency band (third channel).

Note that, for example, when a transmitting device having theconfiguration in FIG. 1 or FIG. 3 generates a modulated signal of firstfrequency band 4601, a modulated signal of second frequency band 4602,and a modulated signal of third frequency band 4603, in the antennaunits in FIG. 1 and the weighting synthesizer in FIG. 3 and FIG. 44 ,settings may be configured so that the directivity of the modulatedsignal of first frequency band 4601 and the directivity of the modulatedsignal of second frequency band 4602 are different. Similarly, in theantenna units in FIG. 1 and the weighting synthesizer in FIG. 3 and FIG.44 , settings may be configured so that the directivity of the modulatedsignal of first frequency band 4601 and the directivity of the modulatedsignal of third frequency band 4603 are different. Moreover, in theantenna units in FIG. 1 and the weighting synthesizer in FIG. 3 and FIG.44 , settings may be configured so that the directivity of the modulatedsignal of second frequency band 4602 and the directivity of themodulated signal of third frequency band 4603 are different.

Specific examples will be given with reference to FIG. 47 , FIG. 48 ,FIG. 49 , and FIG. 50 .

FIG. 47 illustrates a positional relationship between communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4illustrated in FIG. 45 . Accordingly, the reference signs used in FIG.45 are also used in FIG. 47 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 can use spectrum 4601 of the first frequency bandillustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,can use spectrum 4601 of the first frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46as the spectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-2obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, can use spectrum 4601 of thefirst frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used,after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a result ofsignal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and can use spectrum 4601 of the first frequency bandillustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.In this way, the frequency band used by the transmission signal to betransmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, the frequencyband used by the transmission signal to be transmitted to communicationdevice #2 labeled as 4502_2, the frequency band used by the transmissionsignal to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3,and the frequency band used by the transmission signal to be transmittedto communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 can be set to the samefrequency band. This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequencyusage efficiency can be improved.

Next, the temporal presence of signal 103-1 obtained as a result ofsignal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, signal 103-2 obtained as a result of signalprocessing that is to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeledas 4502_2, signal 103-3 obtained as a result of signal processing thatis to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andsignal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processing that is to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

FIG. 48 illustrates a positional relationship between communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4illustrated in FIG. 45 that differs from the example illustrated in FIG.47 . Accordingly, the reference signs used in FIG. 45 are also used inFIG. 48 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 48 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 uses spectrum 4601 of the first frequency bandillustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,uses spectrum 4601 of the first frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 asthe spectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-2obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, uses spectrum 4601 of thefirst frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used,after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a result ofsignal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and uses spectrum 4602 of the second frequency bandillustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.At this time, the reason why the frequency band used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3and the frequency band used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-4obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 are different is because whentransmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequency bandused, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a resultof signal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device#3 labeled as 4502_3 and the frequency band used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4the same, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 have difficulty in splitting the beamwhereby interference increases, which results in a reduction in datareception quality.

This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequency usageefficiency can be improved while ensuring high data reception quality.

Next, the temporal presence of signal 103-1 obtained as a result ofsignal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, signal 103-2 obtained as a result of signalprocessing that is to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeledas 4502_2, signal 103-3 obtained as a result of signal processing thatis to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andsignal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processing that is to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

Note that even with the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 can use spectrum 4601 of the first frequencyband illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,can use spectrum 4601 of the first frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46as the spectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-2obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, can use spectrum 4601 of thefirst frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used,after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a result ofsignal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and can use spectrum 4602 of the second frequencyband illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

FIG. 49 illustrates a positional relationship of communication device #Alabeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 thatare illustrated in FIG. 45 , that differs from the examples illustratedin FIG. 47 and FIG. 48 . Accordingly, the reference signs used in FIG.45 are also used in FIG. 49 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 49 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 uses spectrum 4601 of the first frequency bandillustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,uses spectrum 4602 of the second frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46as the spectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-2obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, uses spectrum 4602 of thesecond frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used,after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a result ofsignal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and uses spectrum 4603 of the third frequency bandillustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.At this time, the reason why the frequency band used by signal 103-1obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, the frequency band used,after frequency conversion, by transmission signal 105-3 that is to betransmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and thefrequency band used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-4obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 are different is because whentransmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequency bandused, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a resultof signal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device#1 labeled as 4502_1, the frequency band used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3,and the frequency band used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-4obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 the same, communication device#1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have difficulty in splittingthe beam whereby interference increases, which results in a reduction indata reception quality.

This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequency usageefficiency can be improved while ensuring high data reception quality.

Next, the temporal presence of signal 103-1 obtained as a result ofsignal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, signal 103-2 obtained as a result of signalprocessing that is to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeledas 4502_2, signal 103-3 obtained as a result of signal processing thatis to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andsignal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processing that is to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

Note that even with the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 can use spectrum 4601 of the first frequencyband illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,can use spectrum 4602 of the second frequency band illustrated in FIG.46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, by signal103-2 obtained as a result of signal processing that is to betransmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, can usespectrum 4602 of the second frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as thespectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and can use spectrum 4603 ofthe third frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to beused, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a resultof signal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device#4 labeled as 4502_4.

FIG. 50 illustrates a positional relationship of communication device #Alabeled as 4501, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 thatare illustrated in FIG. 45 , that differs from the examples illustratedin FIG. 47 , FIG. 48 , and FIG. 49 . Accordingly, the reference signsused in FIG. 45 are also used in FIG. 50 .

With the example illustrated in FIG. 50 , communication device #Alabeled as 4501 uses spectrum 4601 of the first frequency bandillustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,uses spectrum 4602 of the second frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46as the spectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-2obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, uses spectrum 4602 of thesecond frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used,after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a result ofsignal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, and uses spectrum 4601 of the first frequency bandillustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

At this time, the reason why the frequency band used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1and the frequency band used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-2obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 are different is because whentransmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequency bandused, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a resultof signal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device#1 labeled as 4502_1 and the frequency band used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-2 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2the same, communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 and communicationdevice #2 labeled as 4502_2 have difficulty in splitting the beamwhereby interference increases, which results in a reduction in datareception quality.

Similarly, the reason why the frequency band used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3and the frequency band used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-4obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 are different is because whentransmitting device #A labeled as 4501 tries to make the frequency bandused, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as a resultof signal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device#3 labeled as 4502_3 and the frequency band used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4the same, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 and communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 have difficulty in splitting the beamwhereby interference increases, which results in a reduction in datareception quality.

This achieves the advantageous effect that the frequency usageefficiency can be improved while ensuring high data reception quality.

Next, the temporal presence of signal 103-1 obtained as a result ofsignal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device #1labeled as 4502_1, signal 103-2 obtained as a result of signalprocessing that is to be transmitted to communication device #2 labeledas 4502_2, signal 103-3 obtained as a result of signal processing thatis to be transmitted to communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andsignal 103-4 obtained as a result of signal processing that is to betransmitted to communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 will bedescribed.

FIG. 51 illustrates one example of a frame configuration of a modulatedsignal transmitted by communication device A labeled as 4501, and is anexample of symbol arrangement on the horizontal axis indicating time. InFIG. 51 , 5101-1 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, 5101-2 indicatesa data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, 5101-3 indicates a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and 5101-4indicates a data symbol group destined for communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

Each of “data symbol group destined for communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1 or part of a data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2 labeled as 4502_2 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, “datasymbol group destined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 orpart of a data symbol group destined for communication device #3 labeledas 4502_3” 5101_3, and “data symbol group destined for communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 is present in timeinterval 1.

Note that even with the example illustrated in FIG. 47 , communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 can use spectrum 4601 of the first frequencyband illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequencyconversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signal processingthat is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,can use spectrum 4602 of the second frequency band illustrated in FIG.46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, by signal103-2 obtained as a result of signal processing that is to betransmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, can usespectrum 4602 of the second frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as thespectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3obtained as a result of signal processing that is to be transmitted tocommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and can use spectrum 4601 ofthe first frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to beused, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a resultof signal processing that is to be transmitted to communication device#4 labeled as 4502_4.

Moreover, with the example illustrated in FIG. 50 , even whencommunication device #A labeled as 4501 uses spectrum 4601 of the firstfrequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, afterfrequency conversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signalprocessing that is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1, uses spectrum 4602 of the second frequency band illustratedin FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, bysignal 103-2 obtained as a result of signal processing that is to betransmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, uses spectrum4602 of the second frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrumto be used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as aresult of signal processing that is to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and uses spectrum 4603 of the thirdfrequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, afterfrequency conversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signalprocessing that is to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeledas 4502_4.

Furthermore, with the example illustrated in FIG. 50 , even whencommunication device #A labeled as 4501 uses spectrum 4601 of the firstfrequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, afterfrequency conversion, by signal 103-1 obtained as a result of signalprocessing that is to be transmitted to communication device #1 labeledas 4502_1, uses spectrum 4602 of the second frequency band illustratedin FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, after frequency conversion, bysignal 103-2 obtained as a result of signal processing that is to betransmitted to communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, uses spectrum4601 of the first frequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrumto be used, after frequency conversion, by signal 103-3 obtained as aresult of signal processing that is to be transmitted to communicationdevice #3 labeled as 4502_3, and uses spectrum 4603 of the thirdfrequency band illustrated in FIG. 46 as the spectrum to be used, afterfrequency conversion, by signal 103-4 obtained as a result of signalprocessing that is to be transmitted to communication device #4 labeledas 4502_4.

Note that communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, communicationdevice #2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3,and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have, for example, theconfiguration illustrated in FIG. 4 , receive a desired signal, andobtain desired data by causing the reception part in FIG. 4 to operate.

In the present embodiment, when the modulation method and the errorcorrection coding method for generating “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1 labeled as 4502_1 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1” 5101_1, themodulation method and the error correction coding method for generating“data symbol group destined for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2” 5101-2, the modulation method and the errorcorrection coding method for generating “data symbol group destined forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3” 5101_3, and themodulation method and the error correction coding method for generating“data symbol group destined for communication device #4 labeled as4502_4 or part of a data symbol group destined for communication device#4 labeled as 4502_4” 5101_4 in FIG. 51 are the same modulation methodand error correction coding method, and the frequency band used for eachchannel is the same, it is possible to achieve the advantageous effectthat the time it takes to transmit these data symbol groups can beshortened. Moreover, it is possible to achieve the advantageous effectthat these data symbol groups can be transmitted in synchronization (thetransmission start time and transmission end time of these data symbolgroups can be made to be the same). Note that it is possible to usedifferent modulation methods or error correction coding methods for thedata symbol groups.

Moreover, the present embodiment describes a case in which communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 transmits modulated signals including firstdata to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device#2 labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4, but communication device #Alabeled as 4501 may transmit a modulated signal including first data toa single communication device.

For example, time sharing may be used, like in FIG. 52 . Note that inFIG. 52 , elements that are the same as those in FIG. 51 share likereference signs, and time is represented on the horizontal axis. Asillustrated in FIG. 52 , 5101-1 indicating a data symbol group destinedfor communication device #1 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #1, 5101-2 indicating a data symbol group destinedfor communication device #2 or part of a data symbol group destined forcommunication device #2, and 5101-3 indicating a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 or part of a data symbol groupdestined for communication device #3 are transmitted by communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 using interval 1, and 5101-4 indicating a datasymbol group destined for communication device #4 or part of a datasymbol group destined for communication device #4 is transmitted bycommunication device #A labeled as 4501 using interval 2.

When, for example, communication device #A labeled as 4501,communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, communication device #2labeled as 4502_2, communication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 have a positional relationshiplike that illustrated in FIG. 49 , upon communication device #A labeledas 4501 transmitting a data symbol to communication device #4 labeled as4502_4, the data symbol is transmitted using interval 2 like illustratedin FIG. 52 , and upon communication device #A labeled as 4501transmitting a data symbol to communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1,communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, and communication device #3labeled as 4502_3, the data symbol is transmitted using interval 1 likeillustrated in FIG. 52 . Note that the method of using a frequency bandupon transmitting the data symbol group or part of the data symbol groupfor communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, the data symbol group orpart of the data symbol group for communication device #2 labeled as4502_2, and the data symbol group or part of the data symbol group forcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3 may be the same as performedin the description made with reference to FIG. 49 .

In this way, it is possible to achieve the above-described advantageouseffect even when data symbols are transmitted using time sharing.

Note that in the present embodiment, a device is referred to as “server”(4506_4), but even if this device is a communication device rather thana server, the present embodiment can still be carried out in the samemanner.

Moreover, the wireless communication between communication device #Alabeled as 4501 and communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, thewireless communication between communication device #A labeled as 4501and communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, the wirelesscommunication between communication device #A labeled as 4501 andcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, and the wirelesscommunication between communication device #A labeled as 4501communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 described in the presentembodiment may be carried out via MIMO transmission like described inother embodiments, that is to say, a plurality of transmitting antennasand a plurality of receiving antennas (a single receiving antenna isacceptable) may be provided and the transmitting device may transmit aplurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas at the samefrequency and at the same time. Moreover, the wireless communication maybe carried out using a method by which a single modulated signal istransmitted. Note that an example of a configuration of the transmittingdevice and receiving device in such cases is as described in otherembodiments.

Embodiment 9

In the present embodiment, a specific example of communication betweencommunication device #A labeled as 4501 and communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 illustrated in FIG. 45 described in Embodiment 8 willbe given.

As illustrated in FIG. 45 , communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4can communicate over a wired connection to a network.

For example, assume the maximum data transfer speed when communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 transfers data to communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 via wireless communication is faster than the maximumdata transfer speed via communication over the wired connection ofcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 (however, the presentembodiment can be partially carried out even when this condition is notsatisfied).

An example of a configuration of communication device #4 labeled as4502_4 in this case is illustrated in FIG. 53 . In FIG. 53 , receivingdevice 5303 receives an input of received signal 5302 received byantenna 5301, performs processing such as demodulation and errorcorrection decoding, and outputs reception data 5304. For example, inthe case of FIG. 45 , receiving device 5303 receives modulated signalincluding data transmitted by communication device #A labeled as 4501,performs processing such as demodulation, and obtains reception data5304.

Note that in FIG. 53 , antenna 5301 is exemplified as including a singleantenna, but the device may include a plurality of reception antennasand may receive and demodulate a plurality of modulated signals.

Storage 5305 receives an input of reception data 5304 and temporarilystores the reception data. This is because the maximum data transferspeed when communication device #A labeled as 4501 transfers data tocommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 via wireless communication isfaster than the maximum data transfer speed via communication over thewired connection of communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4, so ifstorage 5305 is not included, there is a possibility that part ofreception data 5304 will be lost.

Interface unit 5308 receives an input of data 5307 output from thestorage, and this becomes data 5309 for wired communication afterpassing through interface unit 5308.

Data 5310 for wired communication generates data 5311 via interface unit5308, and transmitting device 5312 receives an input of data 5311,performs processing such as error correction coding, mapping, andfrequency conversion, and generates and outputs transmission signal5313. Transmission signal 5313 is output from antenna 5314 as radiowaves, whereby data is transmitted to a communication partner.

Next, FIG. 54 will be described. As described in Embodiment 8 withreference to FIG. 45 , communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 obtainsdata from communication device #A 4501. In addition, communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4, like a base station or access point,performs communication with a terminal other than communication device#A 4501 and provides information to, for example, a server, via anetwork, or, alternatively, receives information from a server andprovides information to a terminal other than communication device #A4501. FIG. 54 illustrates a state in which communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 is communicating with terminals other thancommunication device #A 4501, i.e., communication device #B labeled as5401 and communication device #C labeled as 5402.

As illustrated in FIG. 54 , for example, communication device #B labeledas 5401 transmits a modulated signal, and communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 receives the modulated signal. Communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 then demodulates the modulated signal and obtains andoutputs reception data 4503_4. Moreover, reception data 4503_4 istransmitted to, for example, server 4506_4 via network 4504_4.

As illustrated in FIG. 54 , data 5451 output by server 4506_4 is inputinto communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 via network 4504_4, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 performs processing such aserror correction coding and modulation to generate a modulated signal,and transmits the modulated signal to communication device #B labeled as5401.

Similarly, for example, communication device #C labeled as 5402transmits a modulated signal, and communication device #4 labeled as4502_4 receives the modulated signal. Communication device #4 labeled as4502_4 then demodulates the modulated signal and obtains and outputsreception data 4503_4. Moreover, reception data 4503_4 is transmittedto, for example, server 4506_4 via network 4504_4.

As illustrated in FIG. 54 , data 5451 output by server 4506_4 is inputinto communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 via network 4504_4, andcommunication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 performs processing such aserror correction coding and modulation to generate a modulated signal,and transmits the modulated signal to communication device #C labeled as5402.

FIG. 55 illustrates an example of communication between (i)communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 and (ii) communication device#A labeled as 4501 and communication device #B labeled as 5401.

First, as indicated by [55-1], communication device #A labeled as 4501starts transmitting a modulated signal including data to communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4.

As indicated by [55-2], communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 startsreceiving the modulated signal transmitted by communication device #Alabeled as 4501. Storage 5305 included in communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 then starts storing the data obtained as a result ofthe reception.

As indicated by [55-3], communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4completes communication with communication device #A labeled as 4501 andcompletes the storing of the data.

As indicated by [55-4], communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 startstransferring the data obtained from communication device #A labeled as4501 and held in storage 5305 to server 4506_4.

Note that the transferring of data may be started before the completionof the storing of the data in [55-3].

As indicated by [55-5], server 4506_4 starts receiving the datatransferred by communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 (that wasobtained from communication device #A labeled as 4501).

As indicated by [55-6], server 4506_4 completes receiving the datatransferred by communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 (that wasobtained from communication device #A labeled as 4501).

As indicated by [55-7], server 4506_4 notifies communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 of the completion of reception of the data transferredby communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 (that was obtained fromcommunication device #A labeled as 4501).

8] Communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 receives the notificationfrom server 4506_4 of the completion of the reception of the data.

9] Communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 deletes the data obtainedfrom communication device #A labeled as 4501 and held in storage 5305.

Note that communication device #A may be notified of the deletion ofthis data.

10] Communication device #B labeled as 5401 starts communicating withcommunication device #A labeled as 4501.

In FIG. 55 , the function whereby communication device #4 labeled as4502_4 deletes the data obtained from communication device #A labeled as4501 and held in storage 5305 is important. This makes it possible toachieve the advantageous effect that the probability that the data fromcommunication device #A labeled as 4501 will be stolen by anothercommunication device can be reduced.

FIG. 56 illustrates an example of communication between (i)communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 and (ii) communication device#A labeled as 4501 and communication device #B labeled as 5401 thatdiffers from the example given in FIG. 55 .

First, as indicated by [56-1], communication device #A labeled as 4501starts transmitting a modulated signal including data to communicationdevice #4 labeled as 4502_4.

As indicated by [56-2], communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 startsreceiving the modulated signal transmitted by communication device #Alabeled as 4501. Storage 5305 included in communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 then starts storing the data obtained as a result ofthe reception.

As indicated by [56-3], the communication device labeled as 4502_4completes communication with communication device #A labeled as 4501 andcompletes the storing of the data. The stored data is split into aplurality of files. In this example, N files are created. N is aninteger that is greater than or equal to 1 or an integer that is greaterthan or equal to 2 (hereinafter, these files will be named first file,second file, ..., and N-th file).

As indicated by [56-4], communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 startstransferring, from among the data obtained from communication device #Alabeled as 4501 and held in storage 5305, the data of a first file, to4506_4.

Note that the transferring of data may be started before the completionof the storing of the data in [56-3].

As indicated by [56-5], server 4506_4 starts receiving the data of thefirst file from among the data transferred by communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 (that was obtained from communication device #Alabeled as 4501).

As indicated by [56-6], server 4506_4 starts receiving the data of thefirst file transferred by communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

As indicated by [56-7], server 4506_4 notifies communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 of the completion of the reception of the data of thefirst file transferred by communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

8] Communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 receives the notificationfrom server 4506_4 of the completion of the reception of the data of thefirst file.

9] Communication device #B labeled as 5401 starts communicating withcommunication device #A labeled as 4501.

10] Server 4506_4 receives the data transmitted by communication device#B labeled as 5401, via communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4.

11] In response to this, for example, server 4506_4 transmits the data.

As indicated by [56-12], communication device #B labeled as 5401receives the data transmitted by server 4506_4, via communication device#4 labeled as 4502_4.

As indicated by [56-13], communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4starts transferring, from among the data obtained from communicationdevice #A labeled as 4501 and held in storage 5305, the data of a secondfile, to 4506_4.

As indicated by [56-14], server 4506_4 starts receiving the data of thesecond file from among the data transmitted by communication device #4labeled as 4502_4 (that was obtained from communication device #Alabeled as 4501).

As indicated by [56-15], server 4506_4 completes the reception of thedata of the second file transferred by communication device #4 labeledas 4502_4.

In FIG. 56 , the function whereby communication device #4 labeled as4502_4 deletes the data obtained from communication device #A labeled as4501 and held in storage 5305 is important. This makes it possible toachieve the advantageous effect that the probability that the data fromcommunication device #A labeled as 4501 will be stolen by anothercommunication device can be reduced (i.e., can ensure security).

With respect to the above, the following two methods are applicable.First Method:

In 8] in FIG. 56 , communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 thatreceived the notification transmitted by the server of the completion ofreception of the data of the first file deletes the data of the firstfile at this point in time (accordingly, communication device #4 labeledas 4502_4 receives the notification transmitted by the server of thecompletion of reception of data of the X-th file, and deletes the dataof the X-th file (note there here, X is an integer that is greater thanor equal to 1 and less than or equal to N)).

As an example of a variation of the first method, communication device#4 labeled as 4502_4 may delete the data of the X-th file along with thecompletion of the transmission of the data of the X-th file to theserver. Second Method:

Communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 completes transmission of thedata of the first file through the N-th file, receives notification thatreception of the data of all files is complete from the server, andthereafter deletes the data of the first file through the N-th file.

As an example of a variation of the second method, communication device#4 labeled as 4502_4 may delete the data of the first file through theN-th file along with the completion of the transmission of the data ofthe first file through the N-th file to the server.

As described above, when the maximum data transfer speed when a firstcommunication device transfers data to a second communication device viawireless communication is faster than the maximum data transfer speedvia communication over the wired connection of the second communicationdevice, the second communication device that received the datatransmitted by the first communication device stores the data in astorage, and after the second communication device transmits the storeddata to another communication device, the second communication devicedeletes the stored data, which achieves the advantageous effect thatdata security can be ensured.

Next, the maximum data transfer speed when a first communication devicetransfers data to a second communication device via wirelesscommunication being faster than the maximum data transfer speed viacommunication over the wired connection of the second communicationdevice will be described.

For example, assume the first communication device uses frequency band A[Hz] when transferring data to the second communication device viawireless communication. Here, for example, the transfer speed when onestream is transmitted using BPSK without using error correction code isapproximately A [bits per second (bps)], the transfer speed when onestream is transmitted using QPSK without using error correction code isapproximately 2 x A [bits per second (bps)], the transfer speed when onestream is transmitted using 16QAM without using error correction code isapproximately 4 x A [bits per second (bps)], and the transfer speed whenone stream is transmitted using 64QAM without using error correctioncode is approximately 6 x A [bits per second (bps)]. Furthermore, thetransfer speed when two streams are transmitted (for example, via MIMOtransmission) using BPSK is approximately 2 x A [bits per second (bps)],the transfer speed when two streams are transmitted using QPSK isapproximately 4 x A [bits per second (bps)], the transfer speed when twostreams are transmitted using 16QAM without using error correction codeis approximately 8 x A [bits per second (bps)], and the transfer speedwhen two streams are transmitted using 64QAM without using errorcorrection code is approximately 12 x A [bits per second (bps)].

Here, the maximum data transfer speed via communication over the wiredconnection of the second communication device is B [bps].

Here, when A ≥ B, with the majority of configurations of communicationparameters, the condition “the maximum data transfer speed when a firstcommunication device transfers data to a second communication device viawireless communication is faster than the maximum data transfer speedvia communication over the wired connection of the second communicationdevice” is satisfied, (however, even if this condition is not satisfied,the present embodiment can be partially carried out).

Accordingly, even when A ≥ B is satisfied, the second communicationdevice that received the data transmitted by the first communicationdevice stores the data in a storage, and the second communication devicedeletes the stored data after the second communication device transmitsthe stored data to another communication device, the advantageous effectthat data security can be ensured can be achieved.

Note that in the present embodiment, a device is referred to as “server”(4506_4), but even if this device is a communication device rather thana server, the present embodiment can still be carried out in the samemanner.

Moreover, network 4504_4 may be a network based on wirelesscommunication. In such cases, the maximum data transfer speed when afirst communication device transfers data to a second communicationdevice via first wireless communication being faster than the maximumdata transfer speed via second wireless communication, which isdifferent from the first wireless communication, of the secondcommunication device is important. Furthermore, when the maximum datatransfer speed via the second wireless communication of the secondcommunication device is expressed as B [bps], satisfying the condition A≥ B is important (however, even if this condition is not satisfied, thepresent embodiment can be partially carried out).

Moreover, the wireless communication between communication device #Alabeled as 4501 and communication device #1 labeled as 4502_1, thewireless communication between communication device #A labeled as 4501and communication device #2 labeled as 4502_2, the wirelesscommunication between communication device #A labeled as 4501 andcommunication device #3 labeled as 4502_3, the wireless communicationbetween communication device #A labeled as 4501 communication device #4labeled as 4502_4, the wireless communication between communicationdevice #B labeled as 5401 and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4,and the communication between communication device #C labeled as 5402and communication device #4 labeled as 4502_4 described in the presentembodiment may be carried out via MIMO transmission like described inother embodiments, that is to say, a plurality of transmitting antennasand a plurality of receiving antennas (a single receiving antenna isacceptable) may be provided and the transmitting device may transmit aplurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas at the samefrequency and at the same time. Moreover, the wireless communication maybe carried out using a method by which a single modulated signal istransmitted. Note that an example of a configuration of the transmittingdevice and receiving device in such cases is as described in otherembodiments.

Embodiment 10

In the present embodiment, a variation of Embodiment 9 will bedescribed.

In FIG. 57 , 5700 indicates a communication device, 5750 indicates apower transmission device, and 5790 indicates a device. In FIG. 58 ,5800 indicates the device labeled as 5790 in FIG. 57 , and 5821indicates a server.

In this example, communication device 5700 and power transmission device5750 illustrated in FIG. 57 communicate wirelessly, for example.

Moreover, power transmission device 5750 illustrated in FIG. 57transmits power, communication device 5700 receives power and charges abattery.

Power transmission device 5750 illustrated in FIG. 57 and device 5790communicate with one another (for example, over a wired connection;however, note that the communication may be wireless).

Moreover, as illustrated in FIG. 58 , device 5800 (in other words,device 5790 in FIG. 57 ) communicates with server 5821 via network 5817.

In this example, the maximum data transfer speed when communicationdevice 5700 transfers data to power transmission device 5750 viawireless communication is faster than the maximum data transfer speedvia communication over the wired connection (or via the wirelesscommunication) of device 5800 (in other words, device 5790 in FIG. 57 )(however, even if this condition is not satisfied, the presentembodiment can be partially carried out).

Stated differently, when the frequency band used when communicationdevice 5700 transfers data to power transmission device 5750 viawireless communication is expressed as A [Hz] and the maximum transferspeed via communication over the wired connection (or via the wirelesscommunication) of device 5800 (in other words, device 5790 in FIG. 57 )is expressed as B [bps], A ≥ B is satisfied (however, even if thiscondition is not satisfied, the present embodiment can be partiallycarried out).

Next, the detailed operation example in FIG. 57 will be described. Powertransmission unit 5753 included in power transmission device 5750receives input(s) of a supply of power 5752 from interface 5751 and/or asupply of power 5765 from external power source, outputs powertransmission signal 5754, and power transmission signal 5754 istransmitted wirelessly from power transmission antenna 5755.

Controller 5703 included in communication device 5700 receives an inputof received signal 5702 received by power reception antenna 5701.

In the description above, the terminology “power transmission antenna”5755 is written, but this may be referred to as a power transmissioncoil. Moreover, the terminology “power reception antenna” 5701 is used,but this may be referred to as a power reception coil.

Controller 5703 outputs power supply signal 5704 and control signal5705. Battery 5706 is charged in response to input of power supplysignal 5704.

Based on the voltage and/or current, for example, controller 5703 knowswhether power is currently being received, and outputs control signal5705 including information on whether power is currently being receivedor not. Note that the element related to power reception may include acommunication function, controller 5703 may know whether power iscurrently being received or not via communication, and may outputcontrol signal 5705 including information on whether power is currentlybeing received or not. Moreover, control signal 5705 may include controlinformation other than the above-described information.

Data accumulation unit 5711 receives an input of data 5710, andaccumulates data. Note that data 5710 may be data generated bycommunication device 5700.

Data accumulation unit 5711 receives an input of control signal 5705,and based on control signal 5705, outputs data 5712 accumulated in dataaccumulation unit 5711.

Communication controller 5708 receives an input of control information5707, and outputs communication control signal 5709.

Transceiver 5713 receives inputs of data 5712, control signal 5705, andcommunication control signal 5709, and based on control signal 5705 andcommunication control signal 5709, determines, for example, thetransmitting method to be used, generates a modulated signal includingdata 5712, and outputs transmission signal 5714 from communicationantenna 5715 as, for example, radio waves.

Moreover, transceiver 5713 receives an input of received signal 5716received by communication antenna 5715, performs processing such asdemodulation and error correction decoding, and outputs reception data5717.

Controller 5757 included in power transmission device 5750 receivesinputs of a supply of power 5752 and information 5756 from device 5790,and outputs communication control signal 5758.

Communication antenna 5759 receives the transmission signal transmittedby the communication partner (communication device 5700). Transceiver5761 receives inputs of received signal 5760 received by communicationantenna 5759, and communication control signal 5758, performs processingsuch as demodulation and error correction decoding, and outputsreception data 5762.

Moreover, transceiver 5761 receives inputs of data 5763 andcommunication control signal 5758, and based on communication controlsignal 5758, determines, for example, the modulation method andtransmitting method to be used, generates a modulated signal, andoutputs transmission signal 5764. Transmission signal 5764 is outputfrom communication antenna 5759 as radio waves.

Signal 5791 is input into and output from power transmission device5750. Signal 5791 is also input into and output from device 5790.

Signal 5791 includes supply of power 5752, information 5756, reception5762, and data 5763. Interface 5751 is an interface for (i) signal 5791and (ii) supply of power 5752, information 5756, reception 5762, anddata 5763.

FIG. 58 illustrates a configuration of device 5790 illustrated in FIG.57 (device 5800), and network 5817 and server 5821 which are connectedto device 5800.

Converter 5802 receives an input of, for example, a supply ofalternating current (AC) power 5801 from an external power source,performs AC to direct current (DC) conversion, and outputs a supply ofDC power 5803. The supply of DC power 5803 becomes 5805 after passingthrough interface 5804.

Storage 5813 outputs notification signal 5814 for notifying that device5800 includes a storage. Modem unit 5811 receives an input ofnotification signal 5814, and outputs data (or modulated signal) 5810including information indicating that device 5800 includes a storage, inorder to notify power transmission device 5750 illustrated in FIG. 57that device 5800 includes a storage. Data (or modulated signal) 5810becomes 5809 after passing through interface 5804.

Modem unit 5811 receives, via interface 5804, as 5807, an input of data5806 obtained from power transmission device 5750 illustrated in FIG. 57. Modem unit 5811 determines whether to store the data in storage 5813.When it is determined to store the data in storage 5813, control signal5812 includes notification information indicating “store the data in thestorage”. Moreover, modem unit 5811 outputs the obtained data 5807 as5816.

Storage 5813 then stores data 5816.

Moreover, there are instances in which modem unit 5811 transmits data toserver 5821 via network 5818. For example, there are instances in whichmodem unit 5811 transmits data stored in storage 5813 to server 5821.Modem unit 5811 outputs, to storage 5813, control signal 5812 includinginformation on a notification to transmit data included in storage 5813to server 5821.

Then, storage 5813 receives the information on the notification totransmit data included in storage 5813 to server 5821 that is includedin control signal 5812, and outputs the stored data 5815.

Modem unit 5811 receives an input of the stored data 5815, and outputsdata 5816 (or a modulated signal including data) that corresponds tothis data. Data (or modulated signal) 5816 (5820) arrives at server 5821via network 5818. If necessary, server 5821 transmits the data toanother device (5822).

Server 5821 receives an input of data 5823 from another device, whicharrives at modem unit 5811 via a network. If necessary, modem unit 5811transmits the data obtained from server 5821 (or a modulated signalincluding the data) to power transmission device 5750 illustrated inFIG. 57 .

Note that “the maximum data transfer speed when communication device5700 transfers data to power transmission device 5750 via wirelesscommunication” is faster than the maximum data transfer speeds of 5816and 5819 in FIG. 58 (however, even if this condition is not satisfied,the present embodiment can be partially carried out).

Stated differently, when the frequency band used when communicationdevice 5700 transfers data to power transmission device 5750 viawireless communication is expressed as A [Hz] and the maximum transferspeed of 5816 and 5819 in FIG. 58 is expressed as B [bps], A ≥ B issatisfied (however, even if this condition is not satisfied, the presentembodiment can be partially carried out).

Moreover, data transfers 5806 and 5809 in FIG. 58 are capable ofensuring sufficient data transfer speeds.

Next, a detailed example of communication between communication device5700 in FIG. 57 , power transmission device 5750 in FIG. 57 , device5790 in FIG. 57 (corresponding to device 5800 in FIG. 58 ), and server5821 in FIG. 58 will be given with reference to FIG. 59 and FIG. 60 .

As illustrated in FIG. 59 , [59-1] first, device 5790 in FIG. 57 , thatis to say, device 5800 in FIG. 58 notifies power transmission device5750 in FIG. 57 that it includes storage 5813.

2] Power transmission device 5750 receives the notification, andrecognizes that device 5790 in FIG. 57 , that is to say, device 5800 inFIG. 58 includes storage 5813.

3] Communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 makes a request to powertransmission device 5750 in FIG. 57 for a supply of power.

4] Power transmission device 5750 in FIG. 57 receives the request, andstarts transmitting power to communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 .

5] Accordingly, communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 starts receivingpower, that is to say, the battery included in communication device 5700in FIG. 57 starts charging.

6] In accordance with starting to receive power, communication device5700 in FIG. 57 notifies power transmission device 5750 in FIG. 57 witha data transfer request.

By the communication device in FIG. 57 requesting power transmissiondevice 5750 to transfer data in accordance with the communication devicein FIG. 57 receiving the power, it is possible to achieve theadvantageous effect that high data transfer speeds can be achieved.Since it is possible to receive power, this means that the communicationdistance for the data transfer is extremely short, which in turn meansthat there is a high probability of a favorable communicationenvironment. Accordingly, the communication device in FIG. 57 can selecta modulation method and an error correction coding method that allow ofhigh data transfer speeds when transmitting the modulation method.

7] Power transmission device 5750 in FIG. 57 receives the data transferrequest from communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 , and notifies thecommunication device in FIG. 57 that power transmission device 5750 isconnected to device 5800 that includes storage 5813.

8] Communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 receives this notification anddetermines a transfer method (transmitting method) to be used. At thistime, a transfer method is selected by communication device 5700 thatsatisfies the condition “the maximum data transfer speed whencommunication device 5700 transfers data to power transmission device5750 via wireless communication is faster than the maximum data transferspeed of 5816 and 5819 in FIG. 58 ”. Stated differently, a transfermethod is selected by communication device 5700 that satisfies thecondition “when the frequency band used when communication device 5700transfers data to power transmission device 5750 via wirelesscommunication is expressed as A [Hz] and the maximum transfer speed of5816 and 5819 in FIG. 58 is expressed as B [bps], A ≥ B”.

As described in Embodiment 9, even when such a selection is made, it ispossible to reduce the probability that part of the data will be lostduring communication.

9] Communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 starts transferring the data(wirelessly).

In 10] and 9], power transmission device 5750 receives the datatransmitted by communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 , and transmits thedata to device 5790 in FIG. 57 , that is to say, device 5800 in FIG. 58. Device 5790 in FIG. 57 , that is to say, device 5800 in FIG. 58receives the data and stores the received data in storage 5813 in FIG.58 .

11] Communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 completes the transferring ofthe data (wirelessly).

12] In accordance with the completion of the transferring of data in11], device 5790 in FIG. 57 , that is to say, device 5800 in FIG. 58completes the storing of the received data into storage 5813.

In accordance with the completion of the storing in [59-12] in FIG. 59 ,processing can proceed to the operations in FIG. 60 . FIG. 60illustrates an example of communication between device 5790 in FIG. 57 ,that is to say, device 5800 in FIG. 58 , and server 5821 in FIG. 58 .

1] Device 5790 in FIG. 57 , that is to say, device 5800 in FIG. 58starts transmitting data stored in storage 5813 to server 5821 vianetwork 5818.

2] Server 5821 in FIG. 58 starts receiving the data.

3] For example, server 5821 in FIG. 58 transmits the received data toanother system.

4] Device 5790 in FIG. 57 , that is to say, device 5800 in FIG. 58completes the transmission of the data stored in storage 5813.

5] Server 5821 in FIG. 58 completes the reception of the data.

6] For example, server 5821 in FIG. 58 completes the transmission of thereceived data to another system.

As described above, communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 recognizes thatthe power transmission device labeled as 5750 in FIG. 57 , which is thecommunication partner of communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 , isconnected to a device that includes a storage, and selects acommunication method based on this. As a result, it is possible toachieve the advantageous effect that the probability of loss of dataresulting from transferring data to another system can be reduced.

Note that in the above description, the wireless communication betweencommunication device 5700 and power transmission device 5750 illustratedin FIG. 57 may be carried out via MIMO transmission like described inother embodiments, that is to say, a plurality of transmitting antennasand a plurality of receiving antennas (a single receiving antenna isacceptable) may be provided and the transmitting device may transmit aplurality of modulated signals from a plurality of antennas at the samefrequency and at the same time. Moreover, the wireless communication maybe carried out using a method by which a single modulated signal istransmitted. Note that an example of a configuration of the transmittingdevice and receiving device in such cases is as described in otherembodiments.

Moreover, communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 may be included in amobile phone terminal, and an example in which communication device 5700in FIG. 57 is included in a conveyance such as a car is conceivable.Moreover, an example in which device 5790 is included in a base station,access point, computer, or server, for example, is conceivable.

Next, problems related to communication antenna arrangement in powertransmission device 5750 illustrated in FIG. 57 will be described withreference to FIG. 61 .

In FIG. 61 , 6100 indicates the contour of the power transmission devicein FIG. 57 . 6101 indicates power transmission coil 5755. Note that inFIG. 57 , “power transmission coil” is phrased as “power transmissionantenna”.

In this example, communication device 5700 in FIG. 57 includes a powerreception coil as power reception antenna 5701.

6150, 6151, and 6152 indicate the contour of communication device 5700in FIG. 57 . As illustrated in FIG. 61 , when the user of communicationdevice 5700 in FIG. 57 causes communication device 5700 to receivepower, there are a variety of ways in which the user may arrangecommunication device 5700, such as the arrangement indicated by 6150,the arrangement indicated by 6151, and the arrangement indicated by6152.

When wireless communication is performed between communication device5700 and power transmission device 5750 in such arrangements, there is adesire for a communication method to be selected that achieves fast datatransfer speeds and yields high data reception quality, in other words,this desire is a problem to be overcome.

Regarding communication device 5700 that communicates with powertransmission device 5750, since communication devices vary from user touser, for example, the arrangement and such of communication antenna5715 may differ from communication device to communication device. Evenunder such conditions, when communication device 5700 and powertransmission device 5750 wirelessly communicate, there is a desire for acommunication method to be selected that achieves fast data transferspeeds and yields high data reception quality, in other words, thisdesire is a problem to be overcome.

The present embodiment will describe a configuration of powertransmission device 5750 illustrated in FIG. 57 for overcoming thisproblem.

FIG. 62 illustrates an example of a favorable arrangement ofcommunication antenna 5759 and power transmission coil 5755 in powertransmission device 5750 illustrated in FIG. 57 . Note that in FIG. 62 ,elements which operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 61 areassigned the same reference numerals, and repeated description thereofis omitted.

In FIG. 62 , 6201_1, 6201_2, 6201_3, 6201_4, 6201_5, 6201_6, 6201_7, and6201_8 are communication antennas of power transmission device 5750.

As illustrated in FIG. 62 , since power transmission device 5750 needsto transmit power to power reception coil 5701 included in communicationdevice 5700, power transmission coil 6101 (corresponding to powertransmission coil 5755 in FIG. 57 ) is disposed, for example, in thecentral region, like illustrated in FIG. 62 .

In this example, power transmission coil 5755 is arranged in a circularshape (so as to form a closed loop). This aspect corresponds to theblack portion of 6101 in FIG. 62 . Accordingly, this circular shapedefines a space inside the circle and a space outside the circle.

In this example, communication antennas of power transmission device5750 are arranged inside of the circular coil and outside of thecircular coil. In the example illustrated in FIG. 62 , communicationantennas 6201_5, 6201_6, 6201_7, and 6201_8 are arranged inside thecircular coil, and communication antennas 6201_1, 6201_2, 6201_3, and6201_4 are arranged outside the circular coil.

When the communication antennas of power transmission device 5750 arearranged in this manner, communication antennas are densely arrangedwith respect to plane 6100, so no matter how communication device 5700is arranged with respect to plane 6100, in communication device 5700 andpower transmission device 5750, the probability that modulated signalreception electric field strength can be ensured is increased. Thismakes it possible to achieve the advantageous effect that it is possibleto select a communication method that achieves a high data transferspeed and ensure high data reception quality. Moreover, when thecommunication antennas of power transmission device 5750 are arranged inthis manner, no matter how the communication antennas are arranged andincluded in communication device 5700, communication antennas aredensely arranged with respect to plane 6100, so in communication device5700 and power transmission device 5750, the probability that modulatedsignal reception electric field strength can be ensured is increased.

Note that the arrangement of the communication antennas of powertransmission device 5750 is not limited to an arrangement like that ofFIG. 61 . For example, the communication antennas of power transmissiondevice 5750 may be arranged like in FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , or FIG. 64 .Note that in FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , and FIG. 64 , elements which operate inthe same manner as those in FIG. 61 are assigned the same referencenumerals, and repeated description thereof is omitted. Here, thecharacterizing point is the formation of a quadrangular shape bycommunication antennas 6201_5, 6201_6, 6201_7, and 6201_8.

A configuration other than a configuration in which four communicationantennas are arranged inside the circular coil and four communicationantennas are arranged outside the circular coil is also acceptable.

For example, even when one or two or more of the communication antennasof power transmission device 5750 are arranged inside the circular coiland one or two or more of the communication antennas of powertransmission device 5750 are arranged outside the circular coil, theadvantageous effects described above can be achieved.

Moreover, when N (N is an integer that is greater than or equal to 1 orgreater than or equal to 2) communication antennas of power transmissiondevice 5750 are arranged inside the circular coil and M (M is an integerthat is greater than or equal to 1 or greater than or equal to 2)communication antennas of power transmission device 5750 are arrangedoutside the circular coil, N = M may be satisfied, and, alternatively, N≠ M may be satisfied. Moreover, when M is greater than N, it is possibleto more densely arrange the antennas.

FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 each illustrate an example of an arrangement ofcommunication antennas where N ≠ M. Note that in FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 ,elements which operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 61 and FIG.62 are assigned the same reference numerals. In FIG. 65 and FIG. 66 ,6201_1, 6201_2, 6201_3, 6201_4, 6201_5, 6201_6, 6201_7, 6201_8, and6201_9 are communication antennas of power transmission device 5750.

Moreover, focusing on the inside of the circular coil, when thecommunication antennas of power transmission device 5750 are arrangedlike in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 , it is possible to more densely arrange thecommunication antennas. Note that in FIG. 67 and FIG. 68 , elementswhich operate in the same manner as those in FIG. 61 and FIG. 62 areassigned the same reference numerals. 6201_1, 6201_2, 6201_3, 6201_4,6201_5, 6201_6, 6201_7, 6201_8, 6201_9, 6201_10, and 6201_11 arecommunication antennas of power transmission device 5750. Here, thecharacterizing point is the formation of a hexagonal shape bycommunication antennas 6201_5, 6201_6, 6201_7, 6201_8, 6201_9, and6201_10.

In, for example, FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , FIG.67 , and FIG. 68 , power transmission coil 5755 of power transmissiondevice 5750 need not be circular in shape. For example, powertransmission coil 5755 may be configured as a closed loop that defines aspace inside the loop and a space outside the loop, and thecommunication antennas of power transmission device 5750 may be arrangedboth inside and outside of the closed loop. Here, the number ofcommunication antennas arranged inside the closed loop and the number ofcommunication antennas arranged outside the closed loop may be the sameas when communication antennas are arranged inside the circle andcommunication antennas are arranged outside the circle.

Hereinbefore, methods of arranging the communication antennas of powertransmission device 5750 have been described, but when the communicationantennas of communication device 5700 are arranged in accordance withthe same method of arranging the communication antennas of powertransmission device 5750, the same advantageous effects can be achieved.

For example, in FIG. 62 , FIG. 63 , FIG. 64 , FIG. 65 , FIG. 66 , FIG.67 , and FIG. 68 , if 6100 is considered to indicate the contour ofcommunication device 5700, 6101 is considered to indicate the powerreception coil 5701 of communication device 5700, and 6201_1, 6201_2,6201_3, 6201_4, 6201_5, 6201_6, 6201_7, 6201_8, 6201_9, 6201_10, 6201_11are considered to indicate communication antennas of communicationdevice 5700, if such an embodiment is carried out such that theconfiguration requirements described above are satisfied, theadvantageous effects described above can be achieved.

Note that when controller 5757 of power transmission device in FIG. 57recognizes that it is not connected to device 5790 from signals 5752,5756, and 5763 from interface 5751, controller 5757 may instruct, via5758, transceiver 5761 and communication antenna 5759 to stop thecommunication function.

Moreover, power transmission device 5750 may include a function forrecognizing a required current (or power) for power transmission and arequired current (or power) for communication via controller 5757, andnotifying that current (or power) is insufficient in the supply of power5752 from interface 5751 (for example, by causing a lamp such as a lightemitting diode (LED) to emit light).

Embodiment 11

Each of the wireless communication methods using a plurality of antennasdescribed in the above embodiments is one example of a wirelesscommunication method that is applicable to a communication system. Thewireless communication method used by the communication system may be acommunication method that performs communication using a device otherthan an antenna such as an optical communication device. In other words,in the present specification, when the communication device, thetransmitting device, the receiving device and the like performcommunication, optical communication using visible light, for example,may be used. Hereinafter, a specific example related to visible lightcommunication will be given as an example of optical communication.First, a first visible light communication example which is one exampleof a visible light communication method applicable to each embodiment ofthe present disclosure will be given.

<Line Scan Sampling>

Smartphones and digital cameras, for example, are equipped with an imagesensor such as a CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) sensor.For example, the entire scene in a single image captured by the CMOSsensor is not captured at a single instant, but rather, for example,captured line by line using a rolling shutter method, whereby the sensorreads out the amount of light received line by line. Accordingly, takingthe readout time into account, the starting and stopping of thereception of light is controlled so that there is a time shift from lineto line. In other words, images captured by the CMOS sensor areconstructed from a plurality of lines captured with a slight time lagbetween each line.

In the first example of a visible light communication method, high-speedreception of visible light signals is achieved based on a method thatfocuses on the characteristics of the CMOS sensor. In other words, inthe first example of a visible light communication method, by utilizingthe slight difference in exposure time between lines, the luminance andcolor of the light source at a plurality of points in time can bemeasured line by line, from a single image (image captured by the imagesensor, i.e., “captured image”), making it possible to capture amodulated signal faster than the frame rate of the image sensor, asillustrated in FIG. 69 .

Hereinafter, this sampling technique is referred to as “line scansampling”, and one line of pixels that are exposed at the same time isreferred to as an “exposure line”.

Note that line scan sampling can be implemented using the rollingshutter scheme of a CMOS sensor, but even when the rolling shutterscheme is implemented using a sensor other than a CMOS sensor, such as acharge-coupled device (CCD) sensor or an organic CMOS sensor, the linescan sampling can be implemented in the same manner.

However, when the photography setting for photographing an image usingthe camera function (the function for capturing a video or still image)is used, even if a rapidly flashing light source is captured, theflashing will not appear as a striped pattern extending along theexposure lines. This is because, with this setting, since the exposuretime is sufficiently longer than the flash cycle, as illustrated in FIG.70 , the change in luminance resulting from the light source flashing(light-emission pattern) is uniform, whereby the variation in pixelvalues between exposure lines is small, resulting in a substantiallyuniform image.

In contrast, by setting the exposure time to the flash cycle of thelight source as illustrated in FIG. 71 , the state of the flashing ofthe light source (light-emission pattern) can be observed as a change inluminance between exposure lines. In FIG. 71 , the length of theexposure period is set slightly longer than the length of the shortestperiod of a continuous light-emitting state, and the difference in starttimes of exposure periods between adjacent exposure lines is set longerthan the shortest period of a continuous light-emitting state, but theexposure period setting in line scan sampling is not limited to thisexample. For example, the length of the exposure period may be setshorter than the shortest period of a continuous light-emitting state,and may be set to approximately double the length of the shortest periodof a continuous light-emitting state. Moreover, in addition to a methodin which the optical signal is expressed as, for example, a combinationof square waves like illustrated in FIG. 72A, a method in which theoptical signal continuously changes may be used as the opticalcommunication method. In any case, with respect to the sampling raterequired to receive and demodulate optical signals, a reception devicethat uses an optical communication method sets the difference betweenstart times or end times between temporally neighboring exposure linesto be less than or equal to the sampling interval corresponding to thesampling rate. Moreover, the reception device having an opticalcommunication method sets the length of the exposure period to be lessthan or equal to the length of the sampling interval. However, thereception device having an optical communication method may set thelength of the exposure period to less than or equal to 1.5 times thesampling interval, and may set the exposure period to less than or equalto 2 times the sampling interval.

For example, exposure lines are designed so as to be parallel to thelengthwise direction of the image sensor. In such cases, in one example,assuming the frame rate is 30 fps (frames per second), at a resolutionof 1920×1080, 32,400 or more samples are obtained each second, and at aresolution of 3840×2160, 64,800 or more samples are obtained eachsecond.

<Line Scan Sampling Application Example>

Note that in the above description, line scan sampling in which a signalthat indicates an amount of light received per line is read out isdescribed, but the method of sampling optical signals using an imagesensor such as a CMOS sensor is not limited to this line scan samplingexample. A variety of methods that can obtain signals sampled at asampling rate higher than the frame rate used in typical video capturingcan be implemented as a sampling method used for optical signalreception. For example, a method of controlling the exposure time perpixel and reading out a signal or a method of controlling the exposuretime per group of pixels arranged in a shape other than a line andreading out a signal may be used by utilizing a global shutter methodthat has a shutter function for each pixel. Moreover, a method may beused in which a signal is read out a plurality of times from the samepixel during a period corresponding to a single frame in the frame rateused in typical video capturing.

<Frame Sampling>

Furthermore, by employing a frame rate method that gives a shutterfunction to each pixel, it is possible to sample optical signals even ina method that speeds up the frame rate.

For example, the embodiments to be described hereinafter can be realizedin any of the methods described above: “Line Scan Sampling”, “Line ScanSampling Application Example”, and “Frame Sampling”.

<Light Source and Modulation Scheme>

In visible light communication, for example, instead of an antenna, alight emitting element such as an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or organicelectroluminescent (EL) element can be used as a transmitter. LEDs andorganic EL elements are commonly used as light sources in displaybacklights, and are capable of rapidly flashing.

However, light sources that are used as visible light communicationtransmitters cannot be allowed to flash uncontrolled when performingvisible light communication depending on the application of the lightsource. When a light source that provides a function that is not visiblelight communication, such as a lighting function, is used for visiblelight communication, if the changes in luminance made for visible lightcommunication are recognizable to the human eye, the originalfunctionality of a light source as a lamp will be lost. Accordingly, thetransmission signal needs to be emitted at a desired brightness andneeds to be imperceptible to the human eye.

One example of a modulation scheme that satisfies these conditions is4PPM (4-Pulse Position Modulation). As illustrated in FIG. 72A, 4PPM isa scheme in which two bits are expressed by a group of four time slotseach indicating either bright or dark light emitted by a light source.Moreover, as illustrated in FIG. 72A, in 4PPM, three of the four slotsare bright and one of the slots is dark. Accordingly, regardless of thecontent of the signal, the average brightness (average luminance) is ¾ =75%.

For comparison, one example of a similar scheme is Manchester encodingillustrated in FIG. 72B. In the Manchester coding scheme, one bit isexpressed with two states, and the modulation efficiency is 50%, whichis the same as 4PPM, but among the two states, one is bright and one isdark, so the average luminance is ½ = 50%. In other words, 4PPM is moresuitable than Manchester encoding as a modulation scheme for visiblelight communication. However, since communication capability is notadversely affected by changes in luminance from visible lightcommunication that are recognizable to the human eye, depending on theapplication, there may be no problem in using a method in which thechanges in luminance are recognizable to the human eye. Accordingly, thetransmitter (light source) may use, for example, an amplitude shiftkeying (ASK) method, a phase shift keying (PSK) method, or a pulseamplitude modulation (PAM) method to generate the modulated signal andpulse the light source to emit light.

<Example of Overall Configuration of Communication System>

As illustrated in FIG. 73 , the communication system that performsvisible light communication includes at least a transmitter thattransmits (emits) optical signals and a receiver that receives opticalsignals. For example, there are two types of transmitters: a variablelight transmitter that changes the transmission content depending on theimage or content to be displayed or depending on time or depending onthe communication partner; and a fixed light transmitter that continuestransmitting fixed transmission content. However, even with aconfiguration including only either the variable light transmitter orthe fixed light transmitter, a communication system that communicatesvia light can be realized.

The receiver can receive an optical signal from the transmitter, obtain,for example, relevant information associated with the optical signal,and provide it to the user.

As shown above, even when a transmitter that transmits optical signalsand a receiver that receives optical signals are applied to eachembodiment in the present specification, each embodiment can be carriedout in the same manner.

This concludes the summary of the visible light communication method,but communication methods applicable to the light communication are notlimited to this example. For example, the light emitter in thetransmitter may transmit data using a plurality of light sources.Moreover, the light receiver in the reception device need not be animage sensor such as a CMOS sensor, and may employ a communicationmethod that can use a device that is capable of converting an opticalsignal into an electrical signal, such as a photodiode. In such cases,since there is no need to perform sampling using the above-describedline scan sampling, such a light receiver is applicable even to methodsthat require 32,400 or more samples per second. Moreover, depending onthe application, for example, a wireless communication method that useslight in frequencies outside of the visible light range, such asinfrared light or ultraviolet light, may be used.

Note that although the configuration illustrated in FIG. 73 is describedas one example of a communication system that performs visible lightcommunication, the configuration of the communication system thatperforms visible light communication is not limited to the configurationillustrated in FIG. 73 . Hereinafter, a second visible lightcommunication example which is one example of a visible lightcommunication method applicable to each embodiment will be given.

Embodiment 12

In the present embodiment, a supplemental description will be givenregarding FIG. 74 . The configuration of the communication system thatperforms visible light communication may be, for example, aconfiguration like that illustrated in FIG. 74 (see, for example, “IEEE802.11-16/1499r1”). In FIG. 74 , the transmission signal is transmittedas an optical signal in a baseband bandwidth without being up-converted.In other words, a device that transmits the optical signal according tothe present embodiment (i.e., a device including a light source) mayhave the configuration illustrated on the transmission-side in FIG. 74(a configuration including elements from “Sym. Map” to “LEDs”), and aterminal that receives the optical signal according to the presentembodiment may have the configuration illustrated on the reception-sidein FIG. 74 (a configuration including elements from “Photo-Diode” to“Sym. DE-MAP”).

FIG. 74 will be described in more detail. The symbol mapper receives aninput of transmission data, performs mapping based on a modulationscheme, and outputs a symbol sequence (ci).

The pre-equalizer receives an input of the symbol sequence, performspre-equalizing processing on the symbol sequence to reduce theequalizing processes on the reception-side, and outputs a pre-equalizedsymbol sequence.

The Hermitian symmetry processor receives an input of the pre-equalizedsymbol sequence, allocates sub-carriers to the pre-equalized symbolsequence to secure Hermitian symmetry, and outputs parallel signals.

The inverse (fast) Fourier transformer receives inputs of the parallelsignals, applies an inverse (fast) Fourier transform to the parallelsignals, and outputs inverse (fast) Fourier transformed signals.

The parallel serial and cyclic prefix adder receives an input of theinverse (fast) Fourier transformed signals, performs parallel conversionand adds cyclic prefix, and outputs the signal-processed signal.

The digital-to-analog converter receives an input of thesignal-processed signal, performs digital-to-analog conversion, outputsan analog signal, and the analog signal is emitted as light from, forexample, one or more LEDs.

Note that the pre-equalizer and the Hermitian symmetry processor neednot be included. In other words, there may be instances in which thepre-equalizer and the Hermitian symmetry processor do not perform theirrespective signal processing.

The photodiode receives an input of light, and obtains a receptionsignal via a transimpedance amplifier (TIA).

The analog-to-digital converter performs an analog-to-digital conversionon the reception signal, and outputs a digital signal.

The cyclic prefix subtractor and serial parallel converter receives aninput of the digital signal, subtracts the cyclic prefix, and thenperforms serial parallel conversion, and receives an input of parallelsignals.

The (fast) Fourier transformer receives inputs of the parallel signals,applies a (fast) Fourier transform to the parallel signals, and outputs(fast) Fourier transformed signals.

The detector receives inputs of the (fast) Fourier transformed signals,performs detection, and outputs a series of reception symbols.

The symbol demapper receives an input of the series of receptionsymbols, performs demapping, and obtains a series of reception data.

Note that FIG. 74 is one non-limiting example; it goes without sayingthat the present embodiment can be carried out regardless of whether thetransmitting device and receiving device support a multi-carrier methodsuch as orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) or support asingle carrier scheme like described below. Accordingly, theconfiguration of the transmitting device and the configuration of thereceiving device are not limited to the example given in FIG. 74 . Notethat examples of single carrier methods include Discrete FourierTransform (DFT)-Spread Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing(OFDM), Trajectory Constrained DFT-Spread OFDM, OFDM based SingleCarrier (SC), Single Carrier (SC)-Frequency Division Multiple Access(FDMA), and Guard interval DFT-Spread OFDM.

Even when a transmitting device that transmits modulated optical signalsand a receiving device that receives modulated optical signals areimplemented in each embodiment according to the present specification inthis way, the embodiments can be carried out in the same manner.

Supplemental Description

Hereinafter, supplemental description of the transmitting device, thereceiving device, the transmitting method, and the receiving methodaccording to the present disclosure will be given.

A transmitting device according to one aspect of the present disclosureincludes a plurality of transmitting antennas, and further includes: asignal processor configured to generate a first baseband signal bymodulating data of a first stream and generate a second baseband signalby modulating data of a second stream; a transmission unit configured togenerate, from the first baseband signal, a plurality of firsttransmission signals having mutually different directivities, generate,from the second baseband signal, a plurality of second transmissionsignals having mutually different directivities, and transmit theplurality of first transmission signals and the plurality of secondtransmission signals at the same time. When a request for transmissionof the first stream is received from a terminal, the transmission unitis further configured to generate, from the first baseband signal, aplurality of third transmission signals having mutually differentdirectivities and being different from the plurality of firsttransmission signals, and transmit the plurality of third transmissionsignals.

Each transmission signal of the plurality of first transmission signalsand the plurality of second transmission signals may include a controlsignal for notifying which one of the data of the first stream and thedata of the second stream the transmission signal is for transmitting.

Each of the plurality of first transmission signals and the plurality ofsecond transmission signals may include a training signal for areceiving device to perform directivity control.

A receiving device according to one aspect of the present disclosureincludes a plurality of receiving antennas, and further includes: areception unit configured to select at least one first signal and atleast one second signal from among a plurality of first signals and aplurality of second signals that are transmitted at the same time by atransmitting device, the plurality of first signals having mutuallydifferent directivities and transfer data of a first stream, and theplurality of second signals having mutually different directivities andtransfer data of a second stream, and perform directivity control forreception of the selected plurality of signals and receive the signals;a signal processor configured to demodulate the received signals andoutput data of the first stream and data of the second stream; and atransmission unit configured to, when the at least one first signal isnot received by the reception unit, request the transmitting device totransmit the first stream.

The reception unit may be configured to select the at least one firstsignal and the at least one second signal, based on a control signalincluded in each of a plurality of received signals, the control signalbeing for notifying which one of the data of the first stream and thedata of the second stream the signal is for transmitting.

The reception unit may be configured to perform directivity controlusing a training signal included in each of the plurality of receivedsignals.

A transmitting method according to one aspect of the present disclosureis executed by a transmitting device including a plurality oftransmission antennas, and includes: (a) generating a first basebandsignal by modulating data of a first stream and generating a secondbaseband signal by modulating data of a second stream; and (b)generating, from the first baseband signal, a plurality of firsttransmission signals having mutually different directivities,generating, from the second baseband signal, a plurality of secondtransmission signals having mutually different directivities, andtransmitting the plurality of first transmission signals and theplurality of second transmission signals at the same time. When arequest for transmission of the first stream is received from aterminal, (b) further includes generating, from the first basebandsignal, a plurality of third transmission signals having mutuallydifferent directivities and being different from the plurality of firsttransmission signals, and transmitting the plurality of thirdtransmission signals.

A receiving method according to one aspect of the present disclosure isexecuted in a receiving device including a plurality of receivingantennas, and includes: (a) selecting at least one first signal and atleast one second signal from among a plurality of first signals and aplurality of second signals that are transmitted at the same time by atransmitting device, the plurality of first signals having mutuallydifferent directivities and transfer data of a first stream, and theplurality of second signals having mutually different directivities andtransfer data of a second stream, and performing directivity control forreception of the selected plurality of signals and receiving thesignals; (b) demodulating the received signals and outputting data ofthe first stream and data of the second stream; and, when the at leastone first signal is not received in (a), (c) requesting the transmittingdevice to transmit the first stream.

According to the present disclosure, compared to when apseudo-omnidirectional pattern antenna is used, it is possible toincrease the communication distance in multicast/broadcast communicationof a plurality of streams.

A communication system according to one aspect of the present disclosureincludes one or more chargers and a server capable of communicating withthe one or more chargers. The server obtains first information from afirst vehicle via a first charger included in the one or more chargers,during charging of the first vehicle by the first charger, and suppliessecond information based on the first information to a second vehiclevia a second charger included in the one or more chargers, duringcharging of the second vehicle by the second charger.

Note that the power transmission device according to the aboveembodiment (for example, power transmission device 5750 in FIG. 57 ) isone example of the charger. In the communication systems illustrated inFIG. 57 and FIG. 58 , server 5821 is exemplified as communicating with asingle power transmission device 5750, but server 5821 may communicatewith a plurality of power transmission devices 5750 (for example, the“another device” described in Embodiment 10). For example, server 5821may be capable of communicating with power transmission device 5750illustrated in FIG. 57 (one example of the second charger) and anotherpower transmission device which is one example of “another device” (oneexample of the first charger (not illustrated in the drawings)). Theconfiguration of the other power transmission device may be the same asthe configuration of power transmission device 5750.

Note that the vehicle is one example of the conveyance equipped with thecommunication device according to the above embodiment (for examplecommunication device 5700 in FIG. 57 ). Moreover, “during charging ofthe... vehicle” includes, for example, charging of the communicationdevice equipped in the vehicle via the power transmission device.Moreover, the charging of the vehicle is one example of a new form ofservice whereby the vehicle is charged while stopped in, for example, aparking lot. Moreover, although the communication system illustrated inFIG. 57 and FIG. 58 is exemplified as including a single communicationdevice (for example, the vehicle equipped with the communicationdevice), the communication system may include, for example, anothercommunication device that communicates with another power transmissiondevice (for example, another vehicle equipped with the othercommunication device). In other words, the communication system mayinclude one vehicle equipped with communication device 5700 that ischarged by power transmission device 5750 (this vehicle is one exampleof the second vehicle), and another vehicle that is charged by anotherpower transmission device (this vehicle is one example of the firstvehicle).

Note that data 5823 output to server 5821 by the other powertransmission device may be data that is obtained via the other powertransmission device from the first vehicle during charging of the firstvehicle by the other power transmission device, and is one example ofthe first information. Server 5821 receives an input of data 5823 fromthe other power transmission device, which arrives at modem unit 5811via a network. If necessary, modem unit 5811 transmits, as data 5809,data 5819 obtained from server 5821 (or a modulated signal including thedata) to power transmission device 5750 illustrated in FIG. 57 .Transmission signal 5764 output to communication device 5700 (that is,the second vehicle) from power transmission device 5750 may be a signalbased on, for example, data 5809, and is one example of the secondinformation supplied to the second vehicle during charging of the secondvehicle by power transmission device 5750.

Note that when power transmission device 5750 is configured to becapable of charging a plurality of vehicles concurrently, thecommunication system may include a single power transmission device.Moreover, the vehicle is, for example, an electric automobile, which isan automobile that drives using an electric motor as a source of powerwhich is electric, or a two-wheeled vehicle that drives using anelectric motor as a source of power which is electric, but the vehicleis not limited to these examples.

Each of the one or more chargers may include: a power transmission coilfor transmitting power to a vehicle; a first communication antenna forcommunicating with the vehicle, the first communication antenna beingarranged inside the power transmission coil; and a second communicationantenna for communicating with the vehicle, the second communicationantenna being arranged outside the power transmission coil.

A communication method according to one aspect of the present disclosureincludes: obtaining first information from a first vehicle via a firstcharger included in one or more chargers, during charging of the firstvehicle by the first charger; and supplying second information based onthe first information to a second vehicle via a second charger includedin the one or more chargers, during charging of the second vehicle bythe second charger.

Although only some exemplary embodiments of the present disclosure havebeen described in detail above, those skilled in the art will readilyappreciate that many modifications are possible in the exemplaryembodiments without materially departing from the novel teachings andadvantages of the present disclosure. Accordingly, all suchmodifications are intended to be included within the scope of thepresent disclosure.

INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY

It is possible for the present disclosure to facilitate, for example,improvement in the performance of a communication system and theprovision of new services.

What is claimed is:
 1. A communication system, comprising: one or morechargers; and a server capable of communicating with the one or morechargers, wherein the server: obtains first information from a firstterminal via a first charger included in the one or more chargers,during charging of the first terminal by the first charger; and suppliessecond information based on the first information to a second terminalvia a second charger included in the one or more chargers, duringcharging of the second terminal by the second charger, each of the oneor more chargers includes: a power transmission coil for transmittingpower to a terminal; and a first communication antenna for communicatingwith the terminal, the first communication antenna being arranged insidethe power transmission coil.
 2. The communication system according toclaim 1, wherein each of the one or more chargers further includes asecond communication antenna for communicating with the terminal, thesecond communication antenna being arranged outside the powertransmission coil.
 3. A charger for charging a terminal, the chargercomprising: a power transmission coil for transmitting power to theterminal; and a first communication antenna for communicating with theterminal, the first communication antenna being arranged inside thepower transmission coil, wherein the charger obtains information relatedto the terminal, from the terminal, during charging of the terminal. 4.The charger according to claim 3, further comprising: a secondcommunication antenna for communicating with the terminal, the secondcommunication antenna being arranged outside the power transmissioncoil.
 5. A terminal configured to be charged by a first charger or asecond charger, wherein each of the first charger and the second chargerincludes: a power transmission coil for transmitting power to theterminal; and a first communication antenna for communicating with theterminal, the first communication antenna being arranged inside thepower transmission coil, and during charging by the first charger, theterminal: outputs first information to the first charger and obtains,via the first charger, second information based on information obtainedfrom an other terminal during charging of the other terminal by thesecond charger.
 6. The terminal according to claim 5, wherein each ofthe first charger and the second charger further includes a secondcommunication antenna for communicating with the terminal, the secondcommunication antenna being arranged outside the power transmissioncoil.